division 00 – procurement and contracting requirements · division 00 – procurement and...

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title Pages

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Notice to Bid 2

Instructions to Bidders 9

Geotechnical Report 36

Annual Wage Order No. 23 16

Sovereign Immunity Limits 2

Affidavit Compliance with Prevailing Wage Laws 1

Affidavit of Work Authorization 1

Affidavit of OSHA Training 2

E-Verify Program for Employment Verification Memorandum of Understanding 12

Contractor’s Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims 2

Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension & Other Responsibility Matters 1

Bid Form 7

Contractor’s Warranty 1

Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 7

Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract 62

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary 4

012500 Substitution Procedures 4

012600 Contract Modification Procedures 3

012900 Payment Procedures 5

013300 Submittal Procedures 9

014000 Quality Requirements 8

014200 References 18

015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 10

016000 Product Requirements 5

017300 Execution 11

017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 7

017700 Closeout Procedures 7

017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 8

017839 Project Record Documents 5

017900 Demonstration and Training 6

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 Selective Demolition 5

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 19

033950 Curing, Sealing, and Hardening Concrete Floors 4

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 17

DIVISION 05 – METALS

055000 Metal Fabrications 11

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

061000 Rough Carpentry 7

064023 Interior Architectural Millwork 10

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072100 Thermal Insulation 4

076200 Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim 11

078413 Penetration Fireproofing 8

079200 Joint Sealants 16

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

080671 Door Hardware Sets 7

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 12

083613 Sectional Doors 11

084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 10

085113 Aluminum Windows 8

087100 Door Hardware 15

088000 Glazing 12

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 7

092116.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 5

092900 Gypsum Board 8

093000 Tiling 10

095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 8

096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 5

096566 Resilient Athletic Flooring 6

099113 Exterior Painting 6

099123 Interior Painting 8

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

102116 Roll-In Shower Bases 4

102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 7

104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 5

104416 Fire Extinguishers 3

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

311000 Site Clearing 5

312000 Earth Moving 13

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321313 Concrete Paving 13

321373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealant 5

323125 Wood Composite Fencing and Gates 7

329200 Turf and Grasses 12

NOTICE TO BID

Sealed proposals will be received for the Fire Station 2 Annex at the Development Services Office, City Hall, 401 Independence Street, Cape Girardeau, Missouri 63703, until 10:00 a.m. September 1, 2016 local time.

Construction of a 4-bay annex building, containing space for fire apparatus maintenance and associated office and storage space. This bid package excludes the metal building manufacture and erection, including steel framing, roof and wall panels, mezzanine structure including deck, stairs and railing, as those items were selected with a previous bid package. This bid package includes site work, foundations, footings, structural slabs, concrete block, MEPFP, finishes and all other appurtenances as specified in the bid documents shall be included in the bid for the City of Cape Girardeau, Missouri

Proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud at 10:00 A.M., September 1,

2016 local time in the Development Services Conference Room.

The Contract provides for the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for the improvement and construction required per the improvement plans, specifications and construction documents.

A certified or cashier's check, or bid bond executed by the bidder and an approved Surety Company, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the bid shall be submitted with each Proposal.

All questions concerning the project shall be submitted in writing to the City of Cape

Girardeau Project Manager by 12:00 P.M., August 26, 2016. The Engineer will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers necessary in response to questions. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.

An mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at 10:00 A.M., local time, August

18, 2016, at the City Hall, Development Services Conference Room, 2nd floor, 401 Independence, Cape Girardeau. Representatives of the Owner will be present to discuss the project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the pre-bid conference. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the rights to reject any or all non-conforming, non-responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner. Owner also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time or changes in Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder.

Plans, specifications, proposal form, and contract for said improvement may be seen and/or obtained in the Development Services Office, City Hall, 401 Independence Street, Cape Girardeau, Missouri 63703. A non-refundable fee of $100.00 per set is required. All bidders are required to purchase plans and specifications to submit a bid for this project.

All wages paid for work under this Contract shall comply with requirements of the

prevailing wage law of the State of Missouri, Sec. 290.210 through 290.340, R.S. Mo. 1978, as amended. Bidders must agree to comply with all statutory regulations referred to in the specifications. Weekly certified payrolls will be required from the General Contractor and Subcontractors.

Pursuant to 285.530 R.S. Mo, the bidder must affirm its enrollment and participation

in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein by including with the bid proposal 1) submitting a completed, notarized copy of AFFIDAVIT OF WORK AUTHORIZATION and 2) providing documentation affirming the bidder’s enrollment and participation in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein.

Additionally, pursuant to 292.675, R.S. Mo, the bidder is informed that all contractors

or subcontractors doing work on this project to provide, and require its on-site employees to complete, a ten (10) hour course in construction safety and health approved by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) or similar program approved by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations which is at least as stringent as an approved OSHA program. The training must be completed within sixty (60) days of the date work on the project commences. On-site employees found on the worksite without documentation of the required training shall have twenty (20) days to produce such documentation.

Anna E. Kangas, AIA, LEED AP® BD+C Building and Code Enforcement Manager City of Cape Girardeau, MO

IB-1

CITY OF CAPE GIRARDEAU

FIRE STATION 2 ANNEX BUILDING INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

(EJCDC 1910-12) (1990)

1. DEFINED TERMS. Terms used in these Instructions to Bid-ders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the construction Contract (No. 1910-8) (1990 Edition) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Certain additional terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the mean-ings indicated below which are applica-ble to both the singular and plural there-of. 1.1. Bidder-one who submits a Bid di-rectly to Owner as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. 1.2. Issuing Office- the office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued and where the bidding proce-dures are to be administered. 1.3. Successful Bidder-the lowest, re-sponsible and responsive Bidder to whom Owner (on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. 2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCU-MENTS. 2.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Doc-uments in the number and for the sum, if any, stated in the Advertisement or Invi-tation to Bid may be obtained from the

Issuing Office. Unless otherwise stated, there is no refund of said sum. 2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Docu-ments must be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpreta-tions resulting from the use of incom-plete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3. Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS. 3.1. To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must be prepared to submit within five days after Bid opening, upon Owner's request, de-tailed written evidence such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments and other such data as may be called for below(or in the Sup-plementary Instructions). Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualifica-tion to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to ob-tain such qualification prior to award of the contract. 3.2. Pursuant to 285.530 RSMo, the bidder must affirm its enrollment and participation in a federal work authoriza-tion program with respect to the em-

IB-2

ployees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein by

submitting a completed, notarized copy of AFFIDAVIT OF WORK AUTHORIZATION and

providing documentation affirm-

ing the bidder’s enrollment and participation in a federal work au-thorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the ser-vices requested herein.

http://www.uscis.gov/portal/site/u

scis 4. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE. 4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bid-der before submitting a Bid: 4.1.1. To examine thoroughly the Con-tract Documents and other related data identified in the Bidding Documents (in-cluding "technical data" referred to be-low); 4.1.2. To visit the site to become famil-iar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work; 4.1.3. To consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work; 4.1.4. To study and carefully correlate Bidder's knowledge and observations with the Contract Documents and such other related data; and

4.1.5. To promptly notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrep-ancies which Bidder has discovered in or between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. 4.3. Information and data shown or in-dicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facili-ties at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and Owner and Engineer do not assume re-sponsibility for the accuracy or com-pleteness thereof unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplemen-tary Conditions. 4.4. Provisions concerning responsibili-ties for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions and Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing or unantici-pated conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.2 and 4.3 of the General Conditions. 4.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bid-der will be responsible to obtain such additional or supplementary examina-tions, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise, which may affect cost, pro-gress, performance or furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, se-quences or procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder and safety precautions and programs incident thereto or which Bidder deems neces-sary to determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance

IB-3

with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 4.6. On request, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the site to con-duct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its for-mer conditions upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests and studies. 4.7. Reference is made to the Supple-mentary Conditions for the identification of the general nature of work that is to be performed at the site by Owner or others(such as utilities and other prime contractors) that relates to the work for which a Bid is to be submitted. On re-quest, Owner will provide to each Bidder for examination access to or copies of Contract Documents (other than por-tions thereof related to price) for such work. 4.8. The submission of a Bid will consti-tute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Docu-ments and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the Contract Documents, that Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities and discrepancies that Bidder has dis-covered in the Contract Documents and the written resolutions thereof by Engi-neer is acceptable to Bidder, and that the Contract Documents are generally

sufficient to indicate and convey under-standing of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the work. 5. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS FOR WORK, ETC. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-ways and ease-ments for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities, con-struction equipment or storage of mate-rials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for by contractor. Easements for per-manent structures or permanent chang-es in existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 6. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDEN-DA. 6.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such ques-tions will be issued by Addenda, mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Engineer as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten days prior to the date for open-ing of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as

IB-4

deemed advisable by Owner or Engi-neer. 7. BID SECURITY. 7.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of five percent of Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or bank check or a Bid Bond (on form attached, if a form is pre-scribed) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions. 7.2. The Bid security of Successful Bid-der will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement, furnished the required contract security and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid security will be re-turned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required contract security within fifteen days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid security of that Bid-der will be forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of the seventh day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the sixty-first day after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid secu-rity with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven business days after the Bid opening. 8. CONTRACT TIMES. The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be sub-stantially completed and also completed and ready for final payment (the term

"Contract Times" is defined in paragraph 1.12 of the General Conditions) are set forth in the Agreement (or incorporated therein by reference to the attached Bid Form). 9. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement. 10. SUBSTITUTE AND "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS. The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment de-scribed in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifica-tions that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be fur-nished or used by Contractor if accepta-ble to Engineer, application for such ac-ceptance will not be considered by En-gineer until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engi-neer is set forth in Paragraphs 6.7.1, 6.7.2 and 6.7.3 of the General Condi-tions and may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 11. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLI-ERS AND OTHERS 11.1. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcon-tractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of ma-terial and equipment) to be submitted to Owner in advance of a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agree-

IB-5

ment, apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within five days after Bid opening submit to Owner a list of all such Subcontrac-tors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed for those por-tions of the Work for which such identi-fication is required. Such list shall be accompanied by an experience state-ment with pertinent information regard-ing similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcon-tractor, Supplier, person or organization if requested by Owner. An Owner or Engineer who after due investigation has reasonable objection to any pro-posed Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization, may before the Notice of Award is given request appar-ent Successful Bidder to submit an ac-ceptable substitute, in which case, ap-parent Successful Bidder shall submit an acceptable substitute, without an in-crease in bid price. If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the contract to the next low-est Bidder that proposes to use ac-ceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations. The declining to make requested substitu-tions will not constitute grounds for sac-rificing the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, other per-son or organization listed and to whom Owner or Engineer does not make writ-ten objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed ac-ceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in Paragraph 6.8.2 of the Gen-eral Conditions.

11.2. In contracts where the Contract Price is on the basis of Cost-of-the-Work Plus a Fee, apparent Successful Bidder, prior to the Notice of Award, shall identi-fy in writing to Owner those portions of the Work that such Bidder proposes to subcontract and after the Notice of Award may only subcontract other por-tions of the Work with Owner's written consent. 11.3. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objec-tion. 12. BID FORM. 12.1. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; additional copies may be obtained from Engineer (or Issu-ing Office). 12.2. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed by printing in black ink or by typewriter. 12.3. Bids by corporations must be ex-ecuted in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evi-dence of authority to sign) and the cor-porate seal must be affixed and attested by the Corporate Secretary or an assis-tant Corporate secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. 12.4. Bids by partnerships must be ex-ecuted in the partnership name and signed by a partner, whose title must appear under the signature and the offi-cial address of the partnership must be shown below the signature.

IB-6

12.5. All names must be typed or print-ed in black ink below the signature. 12.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Ad-denda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 12.7. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must be shown. 12.8. Evidence of authority to conduct business as an out-of-state corporation in the state where the Work is to be per-formed shall be provided in accordance with Paragraph 3 above. State contrac-tor license number, if any, must be shown. 12.10. The Bid price shall include such amounts as the Bidder deems proper for overhead and profit on account of cash allowances named in the contract Doc-uments as provided in GC-11.6. 13. SUBMISSION OF BIDS. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name and address of Bidder and accompanied by the Bid security and other required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 14. MODIFICATION AND WITH-DRAWAL OF BIDS.

14.1. Bids may be modified or with-drawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.2. If, within twenty-four hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from fur-ther bidding on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS. Bids will be opened and (unless obvi-ously non-responsive) read aloud pub-licly at the place where Bids are to be submitted. An abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternatives (if any) will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 16. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE. All Bids will remain subject to ac-ceptance for sixty days after the day of the Bid opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and re-turn the Bid security prior to that date. 17. AWARD OF CONTRACT. 17.1. Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limita-tion the rights to reject any or all non-conforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids and to reject the Bid

IB-7

of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not respon-sive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner. Owner also re-serves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time or changes in Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. Discrepan-cies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepan-cies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in fa-vor of the words. 17.2. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such al-ternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3. Owner may consider the qualifi-cations and experience of Subcontrac-tors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those por-tions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted as provided in the Supple-mentary Conditions. Owner also may consider the operating costs, mainte-nance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of mate-rials and equipment proposed for incor-poration in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the No-tice of Award.

17.4 Owner may conduct such investi-gations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifica-tions and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to per-form and furnish the Work in accord-ance with the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the pre-scribed time. 17.5. If the contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to lowest Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates to Owner that the award will be in the best inter-ests of the Project. 17.6. If the contract is to be awarded, Owner will give Successful Bidder a No-tice of Award within sixty days after the day of the Bid opening. 18. CONTRACT SECURITY. Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth Owner's requirements as to per-formance and payment Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the exe-cuted Agreement to Owner, it must be accompanied by the required perfor-mance and payment Bonds and Certifi-cates of Insurance. 19. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT When Owner gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accom-panied by the required number of un-signed counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Docu-ments attached. Within fifteen days thereafter Contractor shall sign and de-liver the required number of counter-parts of the Agreement and attached

IB-8

documents to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten days thereafter Own-er shall deliver one fully signed counter-part to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identifica-tion. 20. PRE-BID CONFERENCE A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at 10:00 A.M. on the day of Au-gust 18, 2016 at Fire Station 1 1 S. Sprigg St, Cape Girardeau, Missouri. Representative of the Owner and Engi-neer will be present to discuss the pro-ject. Bidders are required to attend and encouraged to participate in the confer-ence. Engineer will transmit to all pro-spective Bidders of record such Adden-da as Engineer considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. 21. TAXES AND PERMITS Attention is directed to the requirements of the General Conditions regarding payment of taxes and obtaining permits. All taxes that are lawfully assessed against Owner or Contractor in connec-tion with the Work shall be paid by Con-tractor. The bid prices shall include all such taxes and the costs of all required permits. Missouri Sales Tax Exemption - Mis-souri State Statutes 144.062, effective August 28, 1994, allows for a sales tax exemption to contractors constructing, repairing or remodeling facilities or pur-chasing personal property and materials to be incorporated into and consumed in the construction of projects for a tax ex-

emption entity. The tax exempt entity shall furnish, upon request, a signed ex-emption certification authorizing such purchases for the construction, repair or remodeling project to the successful bidder after the execution of the con-tract. 22. CERTIFIED PAYROLLS The General Contractor shall provide to the City of Cape Girardeau City Engi-neer’s Office one copy of weekly certi-fied payrolls from the General Contrac-tor and all Subcontractors. After the first payroll, these must be provided by the Contractor and Subcontractor on a weekly basis; accounting for each week until the Contractor or Subcontractor has finished his portion of the project. If no work was done, then a payroll stating “No Work Done” must be submitted. All certified payrolls must be numbered. If needed, the Contractor or Subcontrac-tors may use the payroll form provided by the Department of Labor: http://labor.mo.gov/sites/default/files/pubs_forms/LS-57-AI.pdf 23. ADDITIONAL COMPLIANCE DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED BY SUCCESSFUL BIDDER 23.1 Pursuant to Section 292.675, RSMo., the successful bidder must af-firm its provision of a ten (10) hour Oc-cupational Safety and Health Admin-istration (OSHA) construction safety program for all employees who will be on-site at this project by

submitting a completed, notarized copy of AFFIDAVIT OF OSHA TRAINING along with the re-quired number of copies of the

IB-9

executed Agreement to Owner and

requiring all employees on the job

site to produce documentation that they have successfully com-pleted this construction safety program upon demand of the City or Department of Labor Stand-ards representatives.

IB-10

THIS PAGE INTENTIALLY LEFT BLANK

AFFIDAVIT COMPLIANCE WITH THE PREVAILING WAGE LAW

Before me, the undersigned Notary Public, in and for the County of

, State of , personally came and appeared

(name and title) of the (name of company)

(a corporation) (a partnership) (a proprietorship) and

after being duly sworn did depose and say that all provisions and requirements set out in Chapter

290, Sections 290.210 through and including 290.340, Missouri Revised Statutes, pertaining to the

payment of wages to workmen employed on public works projects have been fully satisfied and

there has been no exception to the full and complete compliance with said provisions and

requirements and with Annual Wage Order No. Section issued by the Division of

Labor Standards (Name of Project) located at

(name of institution) in

County, Missouri, and completed on the day of , 20 .

(Signature and Title of Signer) (Corporate Seal) Subscribed and sworn to me this day of , 20 . Notary Public (Seal)

My commission expires ,

EXHIBIT AFFIDAVIT OF WORK AUTHORIZATION

Comes now as first being duly sworn, on Name Office held my oath, affirm is enrolled and will continue to Company Name participate in a federal work authorization program in respect to employees that will work in connection with the contracted services related to Project Name for the duration of the contract, if awarded in accordance with RSMo Chapter 285.530 (2). I also affirm that does not and will not knowingly Company Name employ a person who is an unauthorized alien in connection with the contracted services related to for the duration of the contract, if awarded. Project name In Affirmation thereof, the facts stated above are true and correct (The undersigned understands that false statements made in this filing are subject to the penalties provided under Section 575.040, RSMo). Signature (person with authority) Printed Name Title Date Subscribed and sworn to before me this of 20 . I am

commissioned as a notary public within the County of , State

of and my commission expires on .

Signature of Notary Date

EXHIBIT AFFIDAVIT OF OSHA TRAINING

COMES NOW (Name) as (Office Held)

of (Company Name/Contractor) and first being duly sworn, on

my oath, affirm in connection with the contracted services related to

(Project Name) for the duration of the contract, as follows:

1. Contractor shall provide a ten (10) hour Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) construction safety program for all employees who will be on-site at the

Project. The construction safety program shall include a course in construction safety and health

that is approved by OSHA or a similar program approved by the Missouri Department of Labor and

Industrial Relations which is at least as stringent as an approved OSHA program as required by

Section 292.675, RSMo.

2. Contractor shall require its on-site employees to complete a construction safety

program within sixty (60) days after the date work on the Project commences, as required by Section

292.675, RSMo.

3. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any of Contractor’s employees found on

the Project site without documentation of the successful completion of a construction safety

program shall be required to produce such documentation within twenty (20) days, or will be subject

to removal from the Project.

4. Contractor shall require all of its Subcontractors to comply with the requirements of

Section 292.675, RSMo.

5. Contractor acknowledges that pursuant to Section 292.675, RSMo., Contractor shall

forfeit to City as a penalty two thousand five hundred dollars ($2,500.000), plus one hundred dollars

($100.00) for each on-site employee employed by Contractor or its Subcontractor, for each calendar

day, or portion thereof, such on-site employee is employed without the construction safety training

required in Section 292.675, RSMo.

6. Contractor acknowledges that violations of Section 292.675, RSMo, and imposition

of the penalties described therein shall be investigated and determined by the Missouri Department

of Labor and Industrial Relations.

7. Contractor acknowledges that in the event that the Missouri Department of Labor

and Industrial Relations has determined that a violation of Section 292.675, RSMo., has occurred

and that a penalty shall be assessed, the City shall withhold and retain all sums and amounts due and

owing when making payments to Contractor under this Contract.

FURTHER AFFIANT SAITH NOT.

IN AFFIRMATION THEREOF, the facts stated above are true and correct (the

undersigned understands that false statements made in this filing are subject to the

penalties provided in Section 575.040, RSMo.)

(name of corporation) By: (name of officer of corporation and title) ATTEST: Secretary (or other officer) (SEAL OF CORPORATION) STATE OF MISSOURI )

) ss. COUNTY OF CAPE GIRARDEAU )

On this ____day of ___________, 20__, before me appeared ______________________, to me personally known, who, being by me duly sworn, did say that he/she is the of , a Missouri Corporation, and that the seal affixed to the foregoing instrument is the seal of said Corporation, and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors, and acknowledged said instrument to be the free act and deed of said Corporation.

IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal, at my office in Cape Girardeau, Missouri, the day and year first above written.

Notary Public

My Commission Expires:

E-VERIFY IS A SERVICE OF DHS AND SSA

Page 1 of 12

Company ID Number: ________________

THE E-VERIFY PROGRAM FOR EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION

MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING

ARTICLE I

PURPOSE AND AUTHORITY This Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) sets forth the points of agreement between the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) and ______________________________ (Employer) regarding the Employer's participation in the Employment Eligibility Verification Program (E-Verify). This MOU explains certain features of the E-Verify program and enumerates specific responsibilities of DHS, the Social Security Administration (SSA), and the Employer. E-Verify is a program that electronically confirms an employee’s eligibility to work in the United States after completion of the Employment Eligibility Verification Form (Form I-9). For covered government contractors, E-Verify is used to verify the employment eligibility of all newly hired employees and all existing employees assigned to Federal contracts. Authority for the E-Verify program is found in Title IV, Subtitle A, of the Illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act of 1996 (IIRIRA), Pub. L. 104-208, 110 Stat. 3009, as amended (8 U.S.C. § 1324a note). Authority for use of the E-Verify program by Federal contractors and subcontractors covered by the terms of Subpart 22.18, “Employment Eligibility Verification”, of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) (hereinafter referred to in this MOU as a “Federal contractor”) to verify the employment eligibility of certain employees working on Federal contracts is also found in Subpart 22.18 and in Executive Order 12989, as amended.

ARTICLE II

FUNCTIONS TO BE PERFORMED A. RESPONSIBILITIES OF SSA 1. SSA agrees to provide the Employer with available information that allows the Employer to confirm the accuracy of Social Security Numbers provided by all employees verified under this MOU and the employment authorization of U.S. citizens. 2. SSA agrees to provide to the Employer appropriate assistance with operational problems that may arise during the Employer's participation in the E-Verify program. SSA agrees to provide the Employer with names, titles, addresses, and telephone numbers of SSA representatives to be contacted during the E-Verify process. 3. SSA agrees to safeguard the information provided by the Employer through the E-Verify program procedures, and to limit access to such information, as is appropriate by law, to individuals responsible for the verification of Social Security Numbers and for evaluation of the E-Verify program or such other persons or entities who may be authorized by SSA as governed by the Privacy Act (5 U.S.C. § 552a), the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 1306(a)), and SSA regulations (20 CFR Part 401).

|E-Verify MOU for Employer|Revision Date 10/29/08| www.dhs.gov/E-Verify


Page 2 of 12


4. SSA agrees to provide a means of automated verification that is designed (in conjunction with DHS's automated system if necessary) to provide confirmation or tentative nonconfirmation of U.S. citizens’ employment eligibility within 3 Federal Government work days of the initial inquiry. 5. SSA agrees to provide a means of secondary verification (including updating SSA records as may be necessary) for employees who contest SSA tentative nonconfirmations that is designed to provide final confirmation or nonconfirmation of U.S. citizens’ employment eligibility and accuracy of SSA records for both citizens and aliens within 10 Federal Government work days of the date of referral to SSA, unless SSA determines that more than 10 days may be necessary. In such cases, SSA will provide additional verification instructions.

B. RESPONSIBILITIES OF DHS 1. After SSA verifies the accuracy of SSA records for aliens through E-Verify, DHS agrees to provide the Employer access to selected data from DHS's database to enable the Employer to conduct, to the extent authorized by this MOU:

• Automated verification checks on alien employees by electronic means, and

• Photo verification checks (when available) on employees.

2. DHS agrees to provide to the Employer appropriate assistance with operational problems that may arise during the Employer's participation in the E-Verify program. DHS agrees to provide the Employer names, titles, addresses, and telephone numbers of DHS representatives to be contacted during the E-Verify process.

3. DHS agrees to provide to the Employer a manual (the E-Verify User Manual) containing instructions on E-Verify policies, procedures and requirements for both SSA and DHS, including restrictions on the use of E-Verify. DHS agrees to provide training materials on E-Verify. 4. DHS agrees to provide to the Employer a notice, which indicates the Employer's participation in the E-Verify program. DHS also agrees to provide to the Employer anti-discrimination notices issued by the Office of Special Counsel for Immigration-Related Unfair Employment Practices (OSC), Civil Rights Division, U.S. Department of Justice. 5. DHS agrees to issue the Employer a user identification number and password that permits the Employer to verify information provided by alien employees with DHS's database. 6. DHS agrees to safeguard the information provided to DHS by the Employer, and to limit access to such information to individuals responsible for the verification of alien employment eligibility and for evaluation of the E-Verify program, or to such other persons or entities as may be authorized by applicable law. Information will be used only to verify the accuracy of Social Security Numbers and employment eligibility, to enforce the Immigration and Nationality Act (INA) and Federal criminal laws, and to administer Federal contracting requirements. 7. DHS agrees to provide a means of automated verification that is designed (in conjunction with SSA verification procedures) to provide confirmation or tentative nonconfirmation of employees' employment eligibility within 3 Federal Government work days of the initial inquiry.



Page 3 of 12


8. DHS agrees to provide a means of secondary verification (including updating DHS records as may be necessary) for employees who contest DHS tentative nonconfirmations and photo non-match tentative nonconfirmations that is designed to provide final confirmation or nonconfirmation of the employees' employment eligibility within 10 Federal Government work days of the date of referral to DHS, unless DHS determines that more than 10 days may be necessary. In such cases, DHS will provide additional verification instructions. C. RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE EMPLOYER 1. The Employer agrees to display the notices supplied by DHS in a prominent place that is clearly visible to prospective employees and all employees who are to be verified through the system. 2. The Employer agrees to provide to the SSA and DHS the names, titles, addresses, and telephone numbers of the Employer representatives to be contacted regarding E-Verify. 3. The Employer agrees to become familiar with and comply with the most recent version of the E-Verify User Manual. 4. The Employer agrees that any Employer Representative who will perform employment verification queries will complete the E-Verify Tutorial before that individual initiates any queries.

A. The Employer agrees that all Employer representatives will take the refresher tutorials initiated by the E-Verify program as a condition of continued use of E-Verify, including any tutorials for Federal contractors if the Employer is a Federal contractor.

B. Failure to complete a refresher tutorial will prevent the Employer from continued use of the program.

5. The Employer agrees to comply with current Form I-9 procedures, with two exceptions:

• If an employee presents a "List B" identity document, the Employer agrees to only accept "List B" documents that contain a photo. (List B documents identified in 8 C.F.R. § 274a.2(b)(1)(B)) can be presented during the Form I-9 process to establish identity.) If an employee objects to the photo requirement for religious reasons, the Employer should contact E-Verify at 888-464-4218.

• If an employee presents a DHS Form I-551 (Permanent Resident Card) or Form I-766 (Employment Authorization Document) to complete the Form I-9, the Employer agrees to make a photocopy of the document and to retain the photocopy with the employee’s Form I-9. The employer will use the photocopy to verify the photo and to assist DHS with its review of photo non-matches that are contested by employees. Note that employees retain the right to present any List A, or List B and List C, documentation to complete the Form I-9. DHS may in the future designate other documents that activate the photo screening tool.

6. The Employer understands that participation in E-Verify does not exempt the Employer from the responsibility to complete, retain, and make available for inspection Forms I-9 that relate to its employees, or from other requirements of applicable regulations or laws, including




Page 4 of 12

the obligation to comply with the antidiscrimination requirements of section 274B of the INA with respect to Form I-9 procedures, except for the following modified requirements applicable by reason of the Employer's participation in E-Verify: (1) identity documents must have photos, as described in paragraph 5 above; (2) a rebuttable presumption is established that the Employer has not violated section 274A(a)(1)(A) of the Immigration and Nationality Act (INA) with respect to the hiring of any individual if it obtains confirmation of the identity and employment eligibility of the individual in compliance with the terms and conditions of E-Verify; (3) the Employer must notify DHS if it continues to employ any employee after receiving a final nonconfirmation, and is subject to a civil money penalty between $550 and $1,100 for each failure to notify DHS of continued employment following a final nonconfirmation; (4) the Employer is subject to a rebuttable presumption that it has knowingly employed an unauthorized alien in violation of section 274A(a)(1)(A) if the Employer continues to employ an employee after receiving a final nonconfirmation; and (5) no person or entity participating in E-Verify is civilly or criminally liable under any law for any action taken in good faith based on information provided through the confirmation system. DHS reserves the right to conduct Form I-9 compliance inspections during the course of E-Verify, as well as to conduct any other enforcement activity authorized by law. 7. The Employer agrees to initiate E-Verify verification procedures for new employees within 3 Employer business days after each employee has been hired (but after both sections 1 and 2 of the Form I-9 have been completed), and to complete as many (but only as many) steps of the E-Verify process as are necessary according to the E-Verify User Manual. The Employer is prohibited from initiating verification procedures before the employee has been hired and the Form I-9 completed. If the automated system to be queried is temporarily unavailable, the 3-day time period is extended until it is again operational in order to accommodate the Employer's attempting, in good faith, to make inquiries during the period of unavailability. In all cases, the Employer must use the SSA verification procedures first, and use DHS verification procedures and photo screening tool only after the SSA verification response has been given. Employers may initiate verification by notating the Form I-9 in circumstances where the employee has applied for a Social Security Number (SSN) from the SSA and is waiting to receive the SSN, provided that the Employer performs an E-Verify employment verification query using the employee’s SSN as soon as the SSN becomes available. 8. The Employer agrees not to use E-Verify procedures for pre-employment screening of job applicants, in support of any unlawful employment practice, or for any other use not authorized by this MOU. Employers must use E-Verify for all new employees, unless an Employer is a Federal contractor that qualifies for the exceptions described in Article II.D.1.c. Except as provided in Article II.D, the Employer will not verify selectively and will not verify employees hired before the effective date of this MOU. The Employer understands that if the Employer uses E-Verify procedures for any purpose other than as authorized by this MOU, the Employer may be subject to appropriate legal action and termination of its access to SSA and DHS information pursuant to this MOU. 9. The Employer agrees to follow appropriate procedures (see Article III. below) regarding tentative nonconfirmations, including notifying employees of the finding, providing written referral instructions to employees, allowing employees to contest the finding, and not taking adverse action against employees if they choose to contest the finding. Further, when employees contest a tentative nonconfirmation based upon a photo non-match, the Employer is required to take affirmative steps (see Article III.B. below) to contact DHS with information necessary to resolve the challenge.




Page 5 of 12

10. The Employer agrees not to take any adverse action against an employee based upon the employee's perceived employment eligibility status while SSA or DHS is processing the verification request unless the Employer obtains knowledge (as defined in 8 C.F.R. § 274a.1(l)) that the employee is not work authorized. The Employer understands that an initial inability of the SSA or DHS automated verification system to verify work authorization, a tentative nonconfirmation, a case in continuance (indicating the need for additional time for the government to resolve a case), or the finding of a photo non-match, does not establish, and should not be interpreted as evidence, that the employee is not work authorized. In any of the cases listed above, the employee must be provided a full and fair opportunity to contest the finding, and if he or she does so, the employee may not be terminated or suffer any adverse employment consequences based upon the employee’s perceived employment eligibility status (including denying, reducing, or extending work hours, delaying or preventing training, requiring an employee to work in poorer conditions, refusing to assign the employee to a Federal contract or other assignment, or otherwise subjecting an employee to any assumption that he or she is unauthorized to work) until and unless secondary verification by SSA or DHS has been completed and a final nonconfirmation has been issued. If the employee does not choose to contest a tentative nonconfirmation or a photo non-match or if a secondary verification is completed and a final nonconfirmation is issued, then the Employer can find the employee is not work authorized and terminate the employee’s employment. Employers or employees with questions about a final nonconfirmation may call E-Verify at 1-888-464-4218 or OSC at 1-800-255-8155 or 1-800-237-2515 (TDD). 11. The Employer agrees to comply with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and section 274B of the INA by not discriminating unlawfully against any individual in hiring, firing, or recruitment or referral practices because of his or her national origin or, in the case of a protected individual as defined in section 274B(a)(3) of the INA, because of his or her citizenship status. The Employer understands that such illegal practices can include selective verification or use of E-Verify except as provided in part D below, or discharging or refusing to hire employees because they appear or sound “foreign” or have received tentative nonconfirmations. The Employer further understands that any violation of the unfair immigration-related employment practices provisions in section 274B of the INA could subject the Employer to civil penalties, back pay awards, and other sanctions, and violations of Title VII could subject the Employer to back pay awards, compensatory and punitive damages. Violations of either section 274B of the INA or Title VII may also lead to the termination of its participation in E-Verify. If the Employer has any questions relating to the anti-discrimination provision, it should contact OSC at 1-800-255-8155 or 1-800-237-2515 (TDD). 12. The Employer agrees to record the case verification number on the employee's Form I-9 or to print the screen containing the case verification number and attach it to the employee's Form I-9. 13. The Employer agrees that it will use the information it receives from SSA or DHS pursuant to E-Verify and this MOU only to confirm the employment eligibility of employees as authorized by this MOU. The Employer agrees that it will safeguard this information, and means of access to it (such as PINS and passwords) to ensure that it is not used for any other purpose and as necessary to protect its confidentiality, including ensuring that it is not disseminated to any person other than employees of the Employer who are authorized to perform the Employer's responsibilities under this MOU, except for such dissemination as may be




Page 6 of 12

authorized in advance by SSA or DHS for legitimate purposes. 14. The Employer acknowledges that the information which it receives from SSA is governed by the Privacy Act (5 U.S.C. § 552a(i)(1) and (3)) and the Social Security Act (42 U.S.C. 1306(a)), and that any person who obtains this information under false pretenses or uses it for any purpose other than as provided for in this MOU may be subject to criminal penalties. 15. The Employer agrees to cooperate with DHS and SSA in their compliance monitoring and evaluation of E-Verify, including by permitting DHS and SSA, upon reasonable notice, to review Forms I-9 and other employment records and to interview it and its employees regarding the Employer’s use of E-Verify, and to respond in a timely and accurate manner to DHS requests for information relating to their participation in E-Verify. D. RESPONSIBILITIES OF FEDERAL CONTRACTORS

1. The Employer understands that if it is a Federal contractor subject to the employment verification terms in Subpart 22.18 of the FAR it must verify the employment eligibility of any “employee assigned to the contract” (as defined in FAR 22.1801) in addition to verifying the employment eligibility of all other employees required to be verified under the FAR. Once an employee has been verified through E-Verify by the Employer, the Employer may not reverify the employee through E-Verify.

a. Federal contractors not enrolled at the time of contract award: An Employer that

is not enrolled in E-Verify as a Federal contractor at the time of a contract award must enroll as a Federal contractor in the E-Verify program within 30 calendar days of contract award and, within 90 days of enrollment, begin to use E-Verify to initiate verification of employment eligibility of new hires of the Employer who are working in the United States, whether or not assigned to the contract. Once the Employer begins verifying new hires, such verification of new hires must be initiated within 3 business days after the date of hire. Once enrolled in E-Verify as a Federal contractor, the Employer must initiate verification of employees assigned to the contract within 90 calendar days after the date of enrollment or within 30 days of an employee’s assignment to the contract, whichever date is later.

b. Federal contractors already enrolled at the time of a contract award: Employers

enrolled in E-Verify as a Federal contractor for 90 days or more at the time of a contract award must use E-Verify to initiate verification of employment eligibility for new hires of the Employer who are working in the United States, whether or not assigned to the contract, within 3 business days after the date of hire. If the Employer is enrolled in E-Verify as a Federal contractor for 90 calendar days or less at the time of contract award, the Employer must, within 90 days of enrollment, begin to use E-Verify to initiate verification of new hires of the contractor who are working in the United States, whether or not assigned to the contract. Such verification of new hires must be initiated within 3 business days after the date of hire. An Employer enrolled as a Federal contractor in E-Verify must initiate verification of each employee assigned to the contract within 90 calendar days after date of contract award or within 30 days after assignment to the contract, whichever is later.

c. Institutions of higher education, State, local and tribal governments and sureties:

Federal contractors that are institutions of higher education (as defined at 20 U.S.C. 1001(a)), State or local governments, governments of Federally recognized Indian tribes, or sureties




Page 7 of 12

performing under a takeover agreement entered into with a Federal agency pursuant to a performance bond may choose to only verify new and existing employees assigned to the Federal contract. Such Federal contractors may, however, elect to verify all new hires, and/or all existing employees hired after November 6, 1986. The provisions of Article II.D, paragraphs 1.a and 1.b of this MOU providing timeframes for initiating employment verification of employees assigned to a contract apply to such institutions of higher education, State, local and tribal governments, and sureties.

d. Verification of all employees: Upon enrollment, Employers who are Federal

contractors may elect to verify employment eligibility of all existing employees working in the United States who were hired after November 6, 1986, instead of verifying only those employees assigned to a covered Federal contract. After enrollment, Employers must elect to do so only in the manner designated by DHS and initiate E-Verify verification of all existing employees within 180 days after the election.

e. Form I-9 procedures for Federal contractors: The Employer may use a

previously completed Form I-9 as the basis for initiating E-Verify verification of an employee assigned to a contract as long as that Form I-9 is complete (including the SSN), complies with Article II.C.5, the employee’s work authorization has not expired, and the Employer has reviewed the information reflected in the Form I-9 either in person or in communications with the employee to ensure that the employee’s stated basis in section 1 of the Form I-9 for work authorization has not changed (including, but not limited to, a lawful permanent resident alien having become a naturalized U.S. citizen). If the Employer is unable to determine that the Form I-9 complies with Article II.C.5, if the employee’s basis for work authorization as attested in section 1 has expired or changed, or if the Form I-9 contains no SSN or is otherwise incomplete, the Employer shall complete a new I-9 consistent with Article II.C.5, or update the previous I-9 to provide the necessary information. If section 1 of the Form I-9 is otherwise valid and up-to-date and the form otherwise complies with Article II.C.5, but reflects documentation (such as a U.S. passport or Form I-551) that expired subsequent to completion of the Form I-9, the Employer shall not require the production of additional documentation, or use the photo screening tool described in Article II.C.5, subject to any additional or superseding instructions that may be provided on this subject in the E-Verify User Manual. Nothing in this section shall be construed to require a second verification using E-Verify of any assigned employee who has previously been verified as a newly hired employee under this MOU, or to authorize verification of any existing employee by any Employer that is not a Federal contractor. 2. The Employer understands that if it is a Federal contractor, its compliance with this MOU is a performance requirement under the terms of the Federal contract or subcontract, and the Employer consents to the release of information relating to compliance with its verification responsibilities under this MOU to contracting officers or other officials authorized to review the Employer’s compliance with Federal contracting requirements.

ARTICLE III

REFERRAL OF INDIVIDUALS TO SSA AND DHS

A. REFERRAL TO SSA




Page 8 of 12

1. If the Employer receives a tentative nonconfirmation issued by SSA, the Employer must print the tentative nonconfirmation notice as directed by the automated system and provide it to the employee so that the employee may determine whether he or she will contest the tentative nonconfirmation. 2. The Employer will refer employees to SSA field offices only as directed by the automated system based on a tentative nonconfirmation, and only after the Employer records the case verification number, reviews the input to detect any transaction errors, and determines that the employee contests the tentative nonconfirmation. The Employer will transmit the Social Security Number to SSA for verification again if this review indicates a need to do so. The Employer will determine whether the employee contests the tentative nonconfirmation as soon as possible after the Employer receives it. 3. If the employee contests an SSA tentative nonconfirmation, the Employer will provide the employee with a system-generated referral letter and instruct the employee to visit an SSA office within 8 Federal Government work days. SSA will electronically transmit the result of the referral to the Employer within 10 Federal Government work days of the referral unless it determines that more than 10 days is necessary. The Employer agrees to check the E-Verify system regularly for case updates. 4. The Employer agrees not to ask the employee to obtain a printout from the Social Security Number database (the Numident) or other written verification of the Social Security Number from the SSA.

B. REFERRAL TO DHS 1. If the Employer receives a tentative nonconfirmation issued by DHS, the Employer must print the tentative nonconfirmation notice as directed by the automated system and provide it to the employee so that the employee may determine whether he or she will contest the tentative nonconfirmation. 2. If the Employer finds a photo non-match for an employee who provides a document for which the automated system has transmitted a photo, the employer must print the photo non-match tentative nonconfirmation notice as directed by the automated system and provide it to the employee so that the employee may determine whether he or she will contest the finding. 3. The Employer agrees to refer individuals to DHS only when the employee chooses to contest a tentative nonconfirmation received from DHS automated verification process or when the Employer issues a tentative nonconfirmation based upon a photo non-match. The Employer will determine whether the employee contests the tentative nonconfirmation as soon as possible after the Employer receives it. 4. If the employee contests a tentative nonconfirmation issued by DHS, the Employer will provide the employee with a referral letter and instruct the employee to contact DHS through its toll-free hotline (as found on the referral letter) within 8 Federal Government work days. 5. If the employee contests a tentative nonconfirmation based upon a photo non-match, the Employer will provide the employee with a referral letter to DHS. DHS will electronically transmit




Page 9 of 12

the result of the referral to the Employer within 10 Federal Government work days of the referral unless it determines that more than 10 days is necessary. The Employer agrees to check the E-Verify system regularly for case updates. 6. The Employer agrees that if an employee contests a tentative nonconfirmation based upon a photo non-match, the Employer will send a copy of the employee’s Form I-551 or Form I-766 to DHS for review by:

• Scanning and uploading the document, or • Sending a photocopy of the document by an express mail account (furnished and paid

for by DHS). 7. The Employer understands that if it cannot determine whether there is a photo match/non-match, the Employer is required to forward the employee’s documentation to DHS by scanning and uploading, or by sending the document as described in the preceding paragraph, and resolving the case as specified by the Immigration Services Verifier at DHS who will determine the photo match or non-match.

ARTICLE IV

SERVICE PROVISIONS

SSA and DHS will not charge the Employer for verification services performed under this MOU. The Employer is responsible for providing equipment needed to make inquiries. To access the E-Verify System, an Employer will need a personal computer with Internet access.

ARTICLE V

PARTIES

A. This MOU is effective upon the signature of all parties, and shall continue in effect for as long as the SSA and DHS conduct the E-Verify program unless modified in writing by the mutual consent of all parties, or terminated by any party upon 30 days prior written notice to the others. Any and all system enhancements to the E-Verify program by DHS or SSA, including but not limited to the E-Verify checking against additional data sources and instituting new verification procedures, will be covered under this MOU and will not cause the need for a supplemental MOU that outlines these changes. DHS agrees to train employers on all changes made to E-Verify through the use of mandatory refresher tutorials and updates to the E-Verify User Manual. Even without changes to E-Verify, DHS reserves the right to require employers to take mandatory refresher tutorials. An Employer that is a Federal contractor may terminate this MOU when the Federal contract that requires its participation in E-Verify is terminated or completed. In such a circumstance, the Federal contractor must provide written notice to DHS. If an Employer that is a Federal contractor fails to provide such notice, that Employer will remain a participant in the E-Verify program, will remain bound by the terms of this MOU that apply to non-Federal contractor participants, and will be required to use the E-Verify procedures to verify the employment eligibility of all newly hired employees. B. Notwithstanding Article V, part A of this MOU, DHS may terminate this MOU if deemed necessary because of the requirements of law or policy, or upon a determination by SSA or




Page 10 of 12

DHS that there has been a breach of system integrity or security by the Employer, or a failure on the part of the Employer to comply with established procedures or legal requirements. The Employer understands that if it is a Federal contractor, termination of this MOU by any party for any reason may negatively affect its performance of its contractual responsibilities. C. Some or all SSA and DHS responsibilities under this MOU may be performed by contractor(s), and SSA and DHS may adjust verification responsibilities between each other as they may determine necessary. By separate agreement with DHS, SSA has agreed to perform its responsibilities as described in this MOU. D. Nothing in this MOU is intended, or should be construed, to create any right or benefit, substantive or procedural, enforceable at law by any third party against the United States, its agencies, officers, or employees, or against the Employer, its agents, officers, or employees. E. Each party shall be solely responsible for defending any claim or action against it arising out of or related to E-Verify or this MOU, whether civil or criminal, and for any liability wherefrom, including (but not limited to) any dispute between the Employer and any other person or entity regarding the applicability of Section 403(d) of IIRIRA to any action taken or allegedly taken by the Employer. F. The Employer understands that the fact of its participation in E-Verify is not confidential information and may be disclosed as authorized or required by law and DHS or SSA policy, including but not limited to, Congressional oversight, E-Verify publicity and media inquiries, determinations of compliance with Federal contractual requirements, and responses to inquiries under the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA). G. The foregoing constitutes the full agreement on this subject between DHS and the Employer. H. The individuals whose signatures appear below represent that they are authorized to enter into this MOU on behalf of the Employer and DHS respectively. To be accepted as a participant in E-Verify, you should only sign the Employer’s Section of the signature page. If you have any questions, contact E-Verify at 888-464-4218. Employer Name (Please Type or Print)

Title

Signature Date Department of Homeland Security – Verification Division Name (Please Type or Print)

Title

Signature Date




Page 11 of 12

Information Required for the E-Verify Program Information relating to your Company:

Company Name:

Company Facility Address:

Company Alternate Address:

County or Parish:

Employer Identification Number:

North American Industry Classification Systems Code:

Parent Company:

Number of Employees:

Number of Sites Verified for:

Are you verifying for more than 1 site? If yes, please provide the number of sites verified for in each State:

State Number of sites Site(s)




Page 12 of 12|E-Verify MOU for Employer|Revision Date 10/29/08| www.dhs.gov/E-Verify

Information relating to the Program Administrator(s) for your Company on policy questions or operational problems:

Name:

Telephone Number:

Fax Number:

E-mail Address:

Name:

Telephone Number:

Fax Number:

E-mail Address:

CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT REGARDING SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS (To be executed and filed in duplicate)

DATE , 20______ PROJECT NAME __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ To the City of Cape Girardeau, Missouri

This is to certify that all lawful claims for material, lubricants, fuel of any kind, repairs on machinery, groceries, foodstuffs, equipment and tools consumed or used in connection with the construction of the above mentioned project, and all insurance premiums, both compensation and all other kinds of insurance on said work, and for all labor performed in said work, whether by subcontractor or claimant in person or by his employee, agent, servant, bailee or bailor, have been paid and discharged in full.

In exchange for final payment from the City under the contract, at the time that payment is due,

the contractor shall hold the City and its officers and employees harmless from any costs they incur as a result of the contractor’s failure to pay any of the claims referred to hereinabove.

_______________________________________ (Contractor – Company Name) (Corporate Seal) By______________________________________ (Signature) ___________________________________ (Corporate Officer -- Name Printed) Title ____________________________________ ************************************************************************************************ STATE OF MISSOURI SS. COUNTY OF __________________________ Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 _______ (Seal) __________________________________ Notary Public

My Commission expires ______________________, 20_________

_________________ Project Number Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibility Matters

The contractor hereby certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief and that it and its principals and its subcontractors and their principals: (a) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible or

voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal or State department or agency; (b) Have not within a three (3) year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a

civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain or performing a public (Federal, State or Local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements or receiving stolen property;

(c) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government

entity (Federal, State or Local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (1)(b) of this certification; and

(d) Have not within a three-year period preceding this subcontract had one or more public

transactions (Federal, State or Local) terminated for cause or default. I understand that a false statement on this certification may be grounds for rejection of this contractor or termination of the contract. In addition, under 18 USC Sec. 1001, a false statement may result in a fine of up to $ 10,000 or imprisonment for up to five (5) years or both. ______________________________________________ Typed Name & Title of Authorized Representative ______________________________________________ ____________________ Signature of Authorized Representative Date

□ I am unable to certify to the above statement. My explanation is attached.

BF-1


FIRE STATION 2 ANNEX BUILDING BID FORM (EJCDC 1910-18) (1990)

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Construction of a 4-bay annex building, containing space for fire apparatus maintenance and associated office and storage space. This bid package excludes the metal building manufacture and erection, including steel framing, roof and wall panels, mezzanine structure including deck, stairs and railing, as those items were selected with a previous bid package. This bid package includes site work, foundations, footings, structural slabs, concrete block, MEPFP, finishes and all other appurtenances as specified in the bid documents shall be included in the bid for the City of Cape Girardeau, Missouri THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: CITY OF CAPE GIRARDEAU, MO 401 INDEPENDENCE STREET CAPE GIRARDEAU, MO 63703 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if the Bid is accepted, to enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the Bid Times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty days after the day of Bid opening. BIDDER will sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required by the Bidding Requirements within fifteen days after the date of OWNER'S notice of Award. 3. In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement, that: (a) BIDDER has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents and the following: Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: (List Addenda by Addendum Number and Date)

BF-2

(b) BIDDER has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work; (c) BIDDER is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. (d) BIDDER has carefully studied all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified. BIDDER acknowledges that such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents and may not be complete for BIDDER'S purposes. BIDDER acknowledges that OWNER and Engineer do not assume responsibility for accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site. BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all such additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost progress, performance or furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by BIDDER and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. BIDDER does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance and furnishing of the Work in accordance with the times, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. (e) BIDDER is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the site that relates to Work for which this Bid is submitted as indicated in the Contract Documents. (f) BIDDER has correlated the information known to BIDDER, information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data with the Contract Documents. (g) BIDDER has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies that BIDDER has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BIDDER, and the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work for which this Bid is submitted. Any questions, comments, or concerns regarding the design of this project should be addressed to Anna Kangas, City of Cape Girardeau at 573-339-6327. (h) This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group association, organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly

BF-3

induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false or sham Bid; BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any advantage over any other Bidder or over OWNER.

(i) Pursuant to 285.530 RSMo, the bidder must affirm its enrollment and participation in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein by

submitting a completed, notarized copy of AFFIDAVIT OF WORK AUTHORIZATION and

providing documentation affirming the bidder’s enrollment and participation in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein.

http://www.uscis.gov/portal/site/uscis

(j) Bidders are informed that the Project is subject to the requirements of Section 292.675, R.S. Mo, which requires all contractors or subcontractors doing work on the Project to provide, and require its on-site employees to complete, a ten (10) hour course in construction safety and health approved by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) or similar program approved by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations which is at least as stringent as an approved OSHA program. The training must be completed within sixty (60) days of the date work on the Project commences. On-site employees found on the worksite without documentation of the required training shall have twenty (20) days to produce such documentation.

4. BIDDER will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s): 4.1

Contract Price: ______________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________($ )

(Total bid amount is to be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern. In case of error in extension, the lump sum prices under each Pay Item will be BIDDER acknowledges that quantities are not guaranteed and final payment will be based on actual quantities determined as provided in the Contract Documents.

BF-4

5. BIDDER agrees that the Work will be substantially complete within ninety (90) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commences to run as provided in paragraph 2.3 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions within one-hundred twenty (120) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commences to run. BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the time specified in the Agreement. BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the time specified in the Agreement. 6. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: (a) Required Bid Security in the form of bid bond or cashiers check.

(b) Acknowledgement of any addenda issued.

(c) Exhibit Affidavit of Work Authorization (d) Exhibit Affidavit of Excessive Unemployment (if applicable)

(e) The E-Verify Program for Unemployment Verification Memorandum of

Understanding http://www.uscis.gov/files/nativedocuments/MOU.pdf (f) Exhibit Affidavit of OSHA Training (g) Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibility Matters

7. Bidder agrees to submit the following documents within three (3) business days after the opening of Bids if requested: (a) BIDDER’S Qualification Statement with supporting data. 8. Communications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to: Name . Address . (a) Performance and Payment Bonding Company Name .

BF-5

Address . Agent\Power of Attorney Name (if used) . Address . 9. Terms used in the Bid which are defined in the General conditions or Instructions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions or Instructions. SUBMITTED on , 20 . State Contractor License No. . IF BIDDER is: An Individual By (SEAL) (Individual's Name) doing business as . Business address: . . Phone No.: . A Partnership By (SEAL) (Firm Name) . (General Partner) Business address: . . Phone No.: . A Corporation By (SEAL) (Corporation Name) . (State of Incorporation)

BF-6

By (SEAL) (Name of Person Authorized to Sign) . (Title) (Corporate Seal) Attest . (Secretary) Business address: . . Phone No.: . Date of Qualification to do business is . A Joint Venture By (SEAL) (Name) . (Address) By (SEAL) (Name) . (Address) Phone Number and Address for receipt of official communications: . . (Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above.)

BF-7

BREAKDOWN OF WORK FORCE (Required): The Contractor shall be registered with the Missouri Secretary of State in order to work on this project. BIDDER hereby states that he will perform the following items of work directly without employment of subcontractors:

It is anticipated that the following subcontractors will be employed for work on this project:

*SUBCONTRACTORS:

(Name of Company) (Type of Work)

* All subcontractors shall be registered with the Missouri Secretary of State in order to work on this project.

BF-8


CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY The contractor signatory below ________________________________________ hereby (Contractor) guarantees ________________________________________________ that the construction (Owner) performed on ___________________________________________________________________ (Project) located at __________________________________________________ to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of improvements by the City Council. This Standard Limited Warranty applies and is limited as follows: 1. To the improvements constructed as shown on the contract documents for the above referenced project and subject to Section 13.12 of the General Conditions. 2. To the construction work that has not been subject to accident, misuse and abuse. 3. To the construction work that has not been modified, altered, defaced and/or had repairs made or attempted by others. 4. That the contractor be immediately notified in writing within 10 days of first knowledge of defect by owner or his/her agents. 5. That contractor shall be given first opportunity to make any repairs, replacement and/or correction to the defective construction at no cost to owner within a reasonable period of time. 6. Under no circumstances shall contractor be liable by virtue of this warranty or otherwise for damage to a person or property whatsoever for any special, indirect, secondary or consequential damages of any nature however arising out of the use or inability to use because of the construction defect. 7. Excluded from this warranty are materials and workmanship covered by warranties by others. ___________________________________ By: _________________________________ (Contractor Name) (Authorized Officer's Signature) ___________________________________ _________________________________ (Address) (Title or Position) ___________________________________ Attest: _____________________________ (City, State, Zip Code) _________________________________ (Title) Dated: ____________________________ (Seal)

A-1


FIRE STATION 2 ANNEX BUILDING

STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of in the year 2016 by and between the City of Cape Girardeau, Missouri (hereinafter called OWNER) and ________________________ (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK. CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows:

Construction of a 4-bay annex building, containing space for fire apparatus maintenance and associated office and storage space. This bid package excludes the metal building manufacture and erection, including steel framing, roof and wall panels, mezzanine structure including deck, stairs and railing, as those items were selected with a previous bid package. This bid package includes site work, foundations, footings, structural slabs, concrete block, MEPFP, finishes and all other appurtenances as specified in the bid documents shall be included in the bid for the City of Cape Girardeau, Missouri Article 2. ENGINEER. The City Engineer or his designee is to act as OWNER'S representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIMES. 3.1 The work will be substantially completed within ninety (90) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in paragraph 2.3 of the General Conditions, and completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions within one hundred twenty (120) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

A-2

3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not competed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred dollars $500.00 for each calendar day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 until the Work is complete and the CONTRACTOR is ready for final payment. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts determined pursuant to paragraphs 4.1 and 4.2 below: 4.1

Contract Price: ______________________

_______________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________($ )

(Total bid amount is to be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern. In case of error in extension, the lump sum prices under each Pay Item will be considered correct, and these sums when properly extended, shall constitute the Bid.) As provided in paragraph 11.9 of the General Conditions estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and determinations of actual quantities and classification are to be made by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9.10 of the General Conditions. Unit prices have been computed as provided in paragraph 11.9.2 of the General Conditions. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress payments; Retainage. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR’S Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, on or about the 10th day of each month during construction as provided in paragraphs 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.9 of the General Conditions (and in the

A-3

case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions.

95% of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If Work has been 50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER, on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed, in which case, the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed.

95% (with the balance being retainage) of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentations satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions).

5.1.2 Upon Substantial Completion, as agreed to by the OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 98% of the Contract Price (with the balance being retainage), less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. Article 6. INTEREST. All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions shall bear interest at the maximum rate allowed by law at the place of the Project. Article 7. CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS. In order to induce OWNER to enter into the Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents (including the Addenda listed in paragraph 8) and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, including "technical data".

A-4

7.2 CONTRACTOR has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 7.3 CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and furnishing of the Work. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has carefully studied all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents and may not be complete for CONTRACTOR’S purposes. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that OWNER and ENGINEER do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all such additional supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies or data are necessary for the performance and furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has correlated the information known to CONTRACTOR, information and observation obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract documents and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data with the Contract Documents. 7.7 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR, and the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the following:

A-5

8.1 This Agreement (pages _1_ to __ inclusive). 8.2 Exhibits to this Agreement (pages BF- 1 to BF- x , inclusive). 8.3 Performance, Payment, and other Bonds, identified as exhibits ___ and consisting of ___ pages. 8.4 Notice to Proceed. 8.5 General Conditions (pages 1 to 55 , inclusive). (EJCDC No. 1910-8 1990 Edition) 8.6 Supplementary Conditions (pages SC-1 to SC-5 , inclusive). 8.7 Specifications bearing the title xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx . 8.8 Drawings. 8.9 Addenda numbers to , inclusive. 8.10 CONTRACTOR’S Bid (pages BF- 1 to BF- 8 , inclusive) marked exhibit “A” . 8.11 Pursuant to 285.530 R.S. Mo, the contractor must affirm its enrollment and participation in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein by 1) submitting a completed, notarized copy of AFFIDAVIT OF WORK AUTHORIZATION and 2) providing documentation affirming the bidder’s enrollment and participation in a federal work authorization program with respect to the employees proposed to work in connection with the services requested herein. 8.12 Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award (pages to ___, inclusive). 8.13 The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. The documents listed in paragraphs 8.2 et seq. above are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in the Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS.

A-6

9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 9.5 Pursuant to 292.675, R.S. Mo, the contractor is informed that all contractors or subcontractors doing work on this project to provide, and require its on-site employees to complete, a ten (10) hour course in construction safety and health approved by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (“OSHA”) or similar program approved by the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations which is at least as stringent as an approved OSHA program. The training must be completed within sixty (60) days of the date work on the project commences. On-site employees found on the worksite without documentation of the required training shall have twenty (20) days to produce such documentation. 9.6 The General Contractor shall provide to the City of Cape Girardeau City Engineer’s Office one copy of weekly certified payrolls from the General Contractor and all Subcontractors. After the first payroll, these must be provided by the Contractor and Subcontractor on a weekly basis; accounting for each week until the Contractor or Subcontractor has finished his portion of the project. If no work was done, then a payroll stating “No Work Done” must be submitted. All certified payrolls must be numbered. If needed, the Contractor or Subcontractors may use the payroll form provided by the Department of Labor: http://labor.mo.gov/sites/default/files/pubs_forms/LS-57-AI.pdf

A-7

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed the Agreement in multiple copies, One counterpart each has been delivered to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER and two counterparts to the OWNER. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed, initialed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or identified by ENGINEER on their behalf. This Agreement will be effective on , 20___ (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). OWNER City of Cape Girardeau CONTRACTOR Scott Meyer, City Manager By: By: [CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL] Attest Attest Bruce Taylor, Deputy City Clerk Address for giving notices Address for giving notices 401 Independence Street Cape Girardeau, MO 63703 (If OWNER is a public body, attach License No. evidence of authority to sign and resolution or other documents Agent for service of process: authorizing execution of Agreement.

(If CONTRACTOR is corporation, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

A-8


August 12, 2016 Cape Girardeau Fire Station #2 Annex 15-1154.00 Cape Giradrdeau, Missouri

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work under separate contracts. 4. Purchase contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: #1154.00 Fire Station #2 Annex.

1. Project Location: 378 South Mt. Auburn Rd. Cape Girardeau, MO 63703.

B. Owner: City of Cape Girardeau.

1. Owner's Representative: Anna Kangas, 573-339-6327, [email protected] .

C. Architect: JEMA, John Mueller, 314-531-7400, [email protected], 3005 Locust Street, St. Louis, MO 63103.

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Structural Engineering: WM Tao & Associates, Mike Nolte, 314-884-7600, [email protected].


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. A new 10,236 square foot vehicle maintenance and fitness center pre-engineered metal building, fully sprinklered, type IIB construction, with mezzanine, exterior materials include concrete masonry units, metal panels, glass, and metal roofing.

1.5 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner has awarded and will assign to Contractor separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

1. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Package: To Zoellner Construction for procurement and erection of pre-engineered metal building, including steel framing, roof and wall panels, and mezzanine structure including deck, stairs, and railing.

1.6 PURCHASE CONTRACTS

A. General: Owner will negotiate purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements.

B. Purchase Contracts Information: a. Kitchen Appliances including Dishwasher, Refrigerator, & Oven/Range. b. Gear Turnout Lockers.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

August 12, 2016 Cape Girardeau Fire Station #2 Annex 15-1154.00 Cape Girardeau, Missouri

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. Substitutions must be submitted before the bids are submitted.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.



c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately but must be submitted before the bids are submitted, on discovery of need for change.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received and approved prior to the bids being submitted. Requests received after that time will not be considered and will be rejected by the Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.



g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and



finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:



a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.



1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 15th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 48 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.



H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating

Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.



1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

L. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.



1.4 SUBMITTALS ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 20 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.



4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.



I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules.



c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or



containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

G. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.



M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

S. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

T. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

U. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.



2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. "No Exceptions Taken" or “Make Corrections Noted” or “Revise and Resubmit” or “Rejected – See Remarks”.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.



D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.



1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as



appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee



payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:



1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.



2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify



agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials (202) 624-5800

www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org



AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The (703) 524-8800 www.ahrinet.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org



ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering

Institute

(See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers (800) 527-4723

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628-6380 www.atis.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534-8300 www.awci.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122



www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association International)

www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703) 907-7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com (703) 724-1128 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176



CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org (800) 328-6306 CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 www.csa.ca (416) 747-4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org ECA Electrical Components Association (703)907-8024 www.ec-central.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-6000 http://content.asce.org/ejcdc/ EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967-5352 (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)



www.intertek-etlsemko.com FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors

Association, Inc. (407) 671-3772

www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org (301) 277-8686 GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers

Association (908) 464-8200

Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)

www.ahrinet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association



(Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (515) 282-8192 www.iapsc.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org ICPA International Cast Polymer Association (703) 525-0320 www.icpa-hq.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (703) 525-0320 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The (919) 549-8411 www.isa.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (801) 341-7360 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA



(Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LGSEA Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (202) 263-4488 www.arcat.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (847) 375-4718 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298-7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and

Fittings Industry Inc. (703) 281-6613

www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942-6591 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6223 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org



NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, ext.

453 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 222-2300 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269) 488-6382 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890



NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers

Association)

www.nofma.org NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) 516-8585 www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422-4556 www.nwfa.org (636) 519-9663 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (248) 848-3180 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com (706) 882-3833



RIS Redwood Inspection Service www.redwoodinspection.com (925) 935-1499 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (909) 396-2000 www.aqmd.com SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542-5040 www.scte.org (610) 363-6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil

Engineers

(See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683-2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,

Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)

www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org



SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) 681-1868 www.swpa.org TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) 895-6911 www.tilt-up.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (914) 332-0040 www.tema.org TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic

Industries Alliance (703) 907-7700

www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795-1747



www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.wcmanet.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door

Association) (312) 321-6802

www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute

of California) (916) 372-9943

www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543



D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Buildings Service



(See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 http://www.hhs.gov/ophs/ RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 http://gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772 www.usp.org USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-

2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-

0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-

1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-

1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard



(See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/ Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dsp.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-

8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-

7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-

2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-

2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-

0080 www.access-board.gov

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home

Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (800) 952-

5210 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-

2041 CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-

6815 www.calregs.com CDHS California Department of Health Services (916) 445-



4171 www.dhcs.ca.gov CDPH California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality Section www.cal-iaq.org CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-

2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development (979) 458-

6606 http://txforestservice.tamu.edu





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 2. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt pavement

for temporary roads and paved areas. 3. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete

pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.



C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.

D. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage.

1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage.

2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.

3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.

E. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails.

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner



and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg. F (20 to 22 deg. C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk

height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".



C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.



G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.



1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.

2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving."

D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.



J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

K. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.



1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

J. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.



C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than



Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.




A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.



4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.



1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.



D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

4. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building.

5. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.




A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

F. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in



increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.



B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility



appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.



3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.



4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.



B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.



3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg. F (27 deg. C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.



4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."



3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from

site improvements. 2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 3. Section 044300 "Stone Masonry" for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone

waste. 4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and

removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.



F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Demolition Waste:

a. Asphalt paving.

2. Construction Waste:

a. Masonry and CMU. b. Lumber. c. Wood sheet materials. d. Wood trim. e. Metals. f. Roofing. g. Insulation. h. Carpet and pad. i. Gypsum board. j. Piping. k. Electrical conduit. l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.




A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information:

1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes). 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes). 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recovery technician.

H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements, that employs a LEED-Accredited Professional, certified by the USGBC, as waste management coordinator.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.



D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste and Form CWM-6 for demolition waste. Include the following:



1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of

collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of

waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.



B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.



C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.



1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.



1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.



j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.



4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation

and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:



1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to



ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily



navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak.



5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.



2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.



1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of

prints. 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were

recorded.

c. Final Submittal:



1) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file plots.

2) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.



m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.



2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For facilitator.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer.



c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording.

2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label

information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use in PDF electronic file format on compact disc.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.

D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences.



f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.



3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.

1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.

1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label.

2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.

3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.



4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:

a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address.

C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.

1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.

a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project

Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes,

stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment.

D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.

1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.

E. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade

improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.



1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.



1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.



D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.

Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.



4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Construction to Be Removed: Existing asphalt and concrete paving.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.




A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Aggregates. 3. Admixtures. 4. Form materials and form-release agents. 5. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Semirigid joint filler. 12. Joint-filler strips. 13. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Alkali silica reactivity in accordance with ASTM C1567. 2. Shrinkage in accordance with ASTM C157. 3. Modulus of elasticity in accordance with ASTM C469. 4. Indication of permeability of concrete in accordance with ASTM C1202. 5. Freeze-thaw durability in accordance with ASTM C457 or ASTM C666.

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.



1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117.



2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.



B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray. 2. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. 3. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag

Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement. 4. Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

5. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

F. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.



G. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

2.7 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Densifier/sealant in accordance with Architectural Drawings and Specifications.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete, certified by retarder manufacturer to not interfere with densifier/sealant as specified in Architectural Drawings and Specifications.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with densifier/sealant as specified in Architectural Drawings and Specifications.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.



2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash

or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.



C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal

maximum aggregate size.

B. Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch or 3/4-

inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch or 3/4-

inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 7. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.



2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete where indicated.



I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.



3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.



1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Engineer.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.



1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to receive a rubbed finish,.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.



3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view. 2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.



3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases in accordance with Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and

Specifications.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.



2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

b. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. See Architectural Drawings and Specifications.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.



3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without



coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's approval.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.



6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.

3.17 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.


THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS 033950 - 1

SECTION 033950 - CURING, SEALING, AND HARDENING CONCRETE FLOORS

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Single application penetrating sealer for new concrete floors in all areas identified to have sealed concrete floors for this project, (Ashford Formula, Curecrete Distribution, Inc).

B. Precautions for avoiding staining concrete before and after application.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete slabs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.

B. Material requirements for concrete to which cure-seal-hardener is to be applied, including cement type, water-cement ratio, type of trowel finish, limitations on admixtures, pigments, bonding agents, and bond breakers, etc.

C. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets, including product specifications, test data, preparation instructions and recommendations, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, and installation methods.

D. Maintenance instructions, including precautions for avoiding staining after application.


A. Installer Qualifications: Applicator experienced with installation of product and certified by manufacturer, or applicator experienced with similar products and providing manufacturer's field technician on site to advise on application procedures; and providing adequate number of skilled workers trained and familiar with application requirements.


A. Deliver product in factory numbered and sealed drums, with numbers recorded for Owner's records.

B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened drums until ready for installation.


A. No satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum or rust stains from concrete.



Prevention is therefore essential. Take precautions to prevent staining of concrete prior to application of cure-seal-hardener and for minimum of three months after application: 1. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab. 2. If vehicles must be temporarily parked on slab, place drop cloths under vehicles

during entire time parked. 3. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper all components that

might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids. 4. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab. 5. Prohibit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slab.

B. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

C. Do not use frozen material; thaw and agitate prior to use.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty that a structurally sound concrete surface prepared and treated according to the manufacturer's directions will remain permanently dustproof, hardened and water repellent. If after the specified sealing period the treated surface does not remain dustproof, hardened and water repellent, provide, at manufacturer's expense, sufficient material to reseal defective areas.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Curecrete Distribution, Inc.

Ashford Formula, By Curecrete, 800-998-5664

B. Substitutions: Approved Equal

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 00280.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cure-Seal-Hardener: Ashford Formula; water-based chemically-reactive penetrating sealer and hardener, that seals by densifying concrete so that water molecules cannot pass through but air and water vapor can, while allowing concrete to achieve full compressive strength, minimizing surface crazing, and eliminating dusting.

1. Colorless, transparent, odorless, non-toxic, non-flammable.



2. Containing no solvents or volatile organic compounds. 3. USDA approved for food handling facilities. 4. Allowing traffic on floors within 2 to 3 hours, with chemical process complete within

3 months. 5. No change to surface appearance except a sheen developed due to traffic and cleaning.

B. Water: Clean, potable.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and are suitable for application of product.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. If this is the applicator's first project using this product, provide the manufacturer's technical representative on-site to familiarize installers with proper procedures.

C. Prevent damage to and soiling of adjacent work.

D. New Concrete: Apply cure-seal-hardener to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm enough to work on after troweling, except on colored concrete wait minimum of 30 days.

1. Spray on at rate of 200 square feet per gallon (4.8 sq m/L). 2. Keep surfaces wet with cure-seal-hardener for minimum soak-in period of 30 minutes,

without allowing drying out or becoming slippery. In hot weather slipperiness may appear before the 30 minute time period has elapsed. If that occurs, apply more cure-seal-hardener as required to keep entire surface in a non-slippery state for the first 15 minutes. For the remaining 15 minutes, mist the surface as needed with water to keep the material in a non-slippery state.

3. After this period, when treated surface becomes slippery lightly mist with water until slipperiness disappears.

4. Wait for surface to become slippery again and then flush entire surface with water removing all residue of cure-seal-hardener.



5. Squeegee surface completely dry, flushing any remaining slippery areas until no residue remains.

6. Wet vacuum or scrubbing machines may be used to remove residue, provided manufacturer's instructions are followed.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed floors until chemical reaction process is complete; at least three months.

1. Comply with precautions listed under PROJECT CONDITIONS. 2. Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations because

water will accelerate the sealing and scrubbing will impart a shine. 3. Clean up spills immediately and spot-treat stains with good degreaser or oil

emulsifier.

B. Precautions and cleaning are the responsibility of the General Contractor until Substantial Completion.



CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Masonry-cell insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.



1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.

3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 4. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Pre-faced CMUs. 2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar

ingredients to be used on Project. 3. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties, material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.



5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high.

2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing.



a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost



or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc. 2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.

C. Pre-faced CMUs: Lightweight hollow concrete units complying with ASTM C 90, with manufacturer's standard smooth resinous facing complying with ASTM C 744.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. CMU-1: Trenwyth, Trendstone Plus Ground Face masonry units, manufactured by

Northfield Block Company, (847-816-9000); Color: Shadow Gray.

2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi (19.3 MPa).

3. Size: Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph, but with pre-faced surfaces having 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) wide returns of facing to create 1/4-inch- (6.5-mm-) wide mortar joints with modular coursing.

4. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample, and as listed above.

2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than CMUs.

C. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.

1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.



1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

J. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.



B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

C. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts.

B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal/Flexible Flashing: Provide metal flashing as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, 26 gauge thick. 60% recycled content 2. Fabric:

a. Polymer fabric; laminated back face to stainless steel core. b. Non-woven drainage fabric: Fabric laminated to front face stainless steel core.

3. Characteristic Type: Engineered system, with high resistant to damage, composite with a stainless steel with non-asphalt adhesive polymer fabric laminated to one stainless steel and non-woven drainage fabric laminated to opposing face with non-asphalt adhesive.

4. Size: Manufacturer’s standard width rolls.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Flash-Vent SS. 2) STS Coatings, Inc.; Wall Guardian TWF Stainless Steel. 3) Building Materials West Company, Inc.; Evacu-Flash SS.



B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal/flexible flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use

metal/flexible flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use

meta/flexible flashing with a drip edge. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal/flexible flashing.

C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.

D. Sealants for Metal/Flexible Flashings: 1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920-11, chemically curing solvent-free formulated silyl-

terminated polyether (STPE) sealant; of type S, grade NS, class 50, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal/flexible flashing and trim and remain watertight.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

2.10 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION

A. Foamed-In-Place Masonry Wall Insulation: See Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation”.



2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match Architect's sample. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Pre-faced CMUs.

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.

1. Mix to match Architect's sample. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following

units: a. Pre-faced CMUs.

F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.

C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.



4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond or bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.



I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following:



1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36

inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:

1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant.

2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint.

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is

complete for application of sealant.

3.9 LINTELS

A. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.



3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.

4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

5. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

6. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.

3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to



perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.



3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 4. Metal bollards. 5. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not

specified in other Sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into concrete unit masonry.


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg. C), material surfaces.




A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.



B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.



1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

G. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).

I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

J. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

L. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

M. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 Interior Painting."

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.



D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

G. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

I. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.



H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.

2.8 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from steel shapes, as indicated.

1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate.



2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for controls and holes for wire.

3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire.

B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts.

1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards.

C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of bollard.

D. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates.

C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.



2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial

Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance

Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.



Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing.

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors and/or anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated.

1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches (100 mm) in concrete.

C. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward bollard.



D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

E. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves preset into concrete. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward internal sleeve.

F. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured.

G. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch (19-mm) machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks.

H. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated.

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least dimension.

D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.



3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.



2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for

fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.



3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods; Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.



F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).


A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated.

G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.



3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 4. Stainless steel countertops.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."


A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, stainless steel materials, and cabinet hardware and accessories.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size.



2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and

surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

2. Stainless steel laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge detail applied to 1 edge.

3. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches (150 mm) square.

4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Certified Wood: Interior architectural woodwork shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no

urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea

formaldehyde. 4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1,

Grade M-2, except for density. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde.



D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure

decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2. Basis of Design: PL-1, Vertical applications.

a. Manufacturer: Wilsonart International. b. Color: Cosmic Strandz, 4941K-18. c. Finish: Linearity.

E. Stainless Steel Laminate: ASTM A240, Standard specification for Chromium-Nickel stainless steel plate, sheet and strip for pressure vessels. 1. Basis of Design: MTL-6, Countertop with Integral Backsplash.

a. Minimum Thickness: 16 gauge. b. Alloy: 304 c. Workability: Corrosive resistance. d. Finish: Polished.

F. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Avonite, Inc.

2. Basis of Design: SS-1, Shower wall panels. a. Manufacturer: Avonite, Inc. b. Color: Nordic, #F1-9119. c. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. d. Thickness: ¼ inch.

3. Basis of Design: SS-2, Window sills.

a. Manufacturer: Avonite, Inc. b. Color: Nordic, #F1-9119. c. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. d. Thickness: 1/2 inch.



2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;

zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.



D. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

F. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

G. Adhesive for Bonding Stainless Steel: Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.



E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS.

D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: White Melamine. 3. Drawer Bottoms: White Melamine.

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated in the “Finish Legend” as shown on the Drawings.

G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

2.6 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. Stainless Steel: Alloy 304.



C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by the “Finish Legend” on the Drawings.

D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

E. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.

F. Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue or exterior-grade plywood.

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

H. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.

I. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes.

2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL SHOWER WALL PANELS AND WINDOW SILLS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: ¼ inch for shower wall panels, and 1/2 inch (13 mm) for window sills.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on the “Finish Legend” on the Drawings.

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16

inches (400 mm) o.c.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent stainless steel material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."

H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.



B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Foamed-In-Place masonry wall insulation.




A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

B. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including R-values, fire performance and sound abatement characteristics.

C. Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit Material Safety Data Sheet complying with OSHA Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CRF 1910 1200.


A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide insulation produced by a single and approved manufacturer. The product must come from the manufacturer pre-mixed to ensure consistency.

B. Installer Qualifications for Foamed-In-Place Masonry Insulation: Engage an experienced dealer/applicator who has been trained and licensed by the product manufacturer and which has not less than three (3) years direct experience in the installation of the product used.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.




A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Rmax, Inc. d. Hunter Panels, Xci Foil.

2. Applicable Standards include: a. C203 – Standard test methods for breaking load and flexural properties of block-

type thermal insulation. b. C209 – Standard test methods for cellulosic fiber insulating board. c. C518 – Standard test method for steady-state thermal transmission properties by

means of the heat flow meter apparatus. d. D1621 – Standard test method for compressive properties of rigid cellular plastics. e. D2126 – Standard test method for response of rigid cellular plastics to thermal and

humid aging. f. E96 – Standard test method for water vapor transmission of materials g. D1623 – Standard test method for tensile and tensile adhesion properties of rigid

cellular plastics.

3. Nominal board thickness: 2.0 inches. 4. R-Value: 13.0 5. Edge Treatment: Square Edge.



2.2 FOAMED-IN-PLACE MASONRY INSULATION

A. Foamed-In-Place Masonry Insulation: Two component thermal insulation produced by combining a plastic resin and catalyst foaming agent surfactant which, when properly ratioed and mixed, together with compressed air produce a cold-setting foam insulation in the hollow cores of hollow unit masonry walls.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Tailored Chemical Products, Core-Fill 500.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed of 0,5 and 0 respectively.

3. Combustion Characteristics: Must be noncombustible, Class A building material.

4. Thermal Values: “R” Value of 4.91/inch @ 32 degrees F mean; ASTM C-177.

5. Sound Abatement: Minimum Sound Transmission Class (“STC”) rating of 53 and a minimum Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class (“OITC”) rating of 44 for 8 inch wall assembly (ASTM E 90-90).

6. Application Assemblies: a. Block Walls: 6”, 8”, 10” or 12” concrete masonry units. b. Cavity Walls: 2” cavity or greater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.



D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

E. Install foamed-in-place insulation from interior, or as specified, prior to installation of interior finish work and after all masonry and structural concrete work is in place; comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units loosely laid according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) in from exterior walls.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

A. Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry wall where shown on the Drawings and as follows:

1. The foam insulation shall be pressure injected through a series of 5/8 to 7/8 inch holes drilled into every vertical column of block cells (every 8 inches on center) beginning at an approximate height of four (4) feet from finished floor level.

2. Repeat this procedure at an approximate height of ten (10) feet above the first horizontal row of holes (or as needed) until the void is completely filled.

3. Patch holes with mortar and score to resemble existing surface.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured Products:

a. Manufactured through-wall flashing and counterflashing.

2. Formed Products: a. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-sloped roof sheet metal fabrications.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49: 1. Wind Zone 3: For velocity pressures of 46 to 104 lbf/sq. ft. (2.20 to 4.98 kPa): 208-

lbf/sq. ft. (9.96-kPa) perimeter uplift force, 312-lbf/sq. ft. (14.94-kPa) corner uplift force, and 104-lbf/sq. ft. (4.98-kPa) outward force.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg. C), material surfaces.




A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of

expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches

(1:10).

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.

3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and

condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.



2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality.

2. Surface: Smooth, flat and with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer KYNAR 5000 PVDF or HYLAR 5000 finish. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg. F (116 deg. C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg. F (29

deg. C). 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50

percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.



2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Through-Wall Ribbed Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.

1. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

3. Accessories: a. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before

counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

4. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.



G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.

B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.

C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.



B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.



2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg. F (4 and 21 deg. C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg. F (4 deg. C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.

2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.



C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch (600-mm) centers.

2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch (600-mm) centers.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry."

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.



E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."



B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors and floor/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.



1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

G. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.



E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:



1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.



3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-0001-0999, C-BJ-0001-0999, and F-A-0001-0999. 2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1001-1999, C-BJ-1001-1999, C-BK-1001-1999, F-A-1001-1999, F-B-1001-1999, and W-J-1001-1999.

2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-2001-2999, C-BJ-2001-2999, F-A-2001-2999, F-B-2001-2999, and W-J-2001-2999.




E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables:



F. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables:



G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-5001-5999, C-BJ-5001-5999, F-A-5001-5999, and W-J-5001-5999.


H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-6001-6999, F-A-6001-6999, and W-L-6001-6999. 2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-7001-7999 and W-J-7001-7999. 2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-8001-8999 and W-J-8001-8999. 2. W-Rating: No leakage of water at completion of water leakage testing. 3. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Polysulfide joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. 5. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants. 6. Preformed joint sealants.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 3. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 4. Section 093000 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. 5. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with

acoustical sealant. 6. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements,

walkways, and curbing.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.





B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

F. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg. F (5 deg. C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.



4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.



1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. b. Pecora Corporation; 890. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000, SilPruf SCS2000 and

UltraPruf II SCS2900. c. Pecora Corporation; 864, 895, and 898. d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 and Spectrem 3.

C. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000 and

UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. e. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG and Tremsil 600.



D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 1200. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 999-A. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Contractors SCS1000 and Construction

SCS1200. d. Pecora Corporation; 860. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-601. f. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5732 Polyglaze. g. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze and Tremsil 200.

E. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800.

F. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. b. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL.

G. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; FC Parking Structure Sealant.

H. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. Pecora Corporation; 898.

I. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.



2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.


a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921.

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-901.

C. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900, 915, and 916 Textured. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100, Permathane SM7108, and

Permathane SM7110. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. f. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.

D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.

E. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 950. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7101. e. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL. f. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.

F. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.




a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 and Dymeric 240 FC.

G. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 500. b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type II, Elasto-

Thane 227 R Type II, and Elasto-Thane 227 Type II. c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS. e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.

H. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use T.


a. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-270. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

I. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type II and

Elasto-Thane 227 Type II. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.

J. Immersible, Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.

K. Immersible, Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Uses T and I.


a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1CSL.



b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.

L. Immersible Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.

M. Immersible Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 245.

2.4 POLYSULFIDE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elastoseal 230 Type I. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Seal One Step.

B. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Seal 227 Type II. b. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC-2+. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Seal Gun Grade.

C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC-2+.

D. Immersible, Multicomponent Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Polysulfide Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T and Use I.


a. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC-2+.



2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. c. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.6 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311.


a. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant. b. Tremco Incorporated; Mono 555.

B. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311.


a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Butyl Sealant.

2.7 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraSpan US1100. c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.

B. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.



b. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.9 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with

preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6 mm) inside masking tape.



3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.

H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per

each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.



5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, pourable, traffic grade. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. f. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. g. Other joints as indicated.



2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, pourable, traffic grade. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and

windows. f. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Silicone. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Location:

a. Acoustical joints where indicated. b. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

AUGUST 12, 2016 CAPE GIRARDEAU FIRE STATION #2 ANNEX 15-1154.00 CAPE GIRARDEAU, MISSOURI

DOOR HARDWARE SETS 080671 - 1

SECTION 080671 – DOOR HARDWARE SETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section references specification sections relating to commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding Doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Commercial door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical and access control door hardware. 3. Electromechanical and access control door hardware power supplies, back-ups and surge

protection. 4. Automatic operators. 5. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.


1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: Reference Related Sections for requirements regarding compliance with applicable industry standards.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans

and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders.

D. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service



representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.

F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in the Related Sections.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum [5] years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum [3] years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum [5] years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in the Related Sections from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the applicable model building code.

F. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.



C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door and Frame Preparation: Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Refer to “PART 3 – EXECUTION” for required specification sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The door hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a



hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the door hardware sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.

C. Products listed in the Door Hardware Sets must meet the requirements described in the specification sections noted.

1. Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

D. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney

2. RO - Rockwood

3. SA - Sargent

4. RF - Rixson

5. NO - Norton

6. PE - Pemko

Hardware Schedule

Set: 1.0

Doors: 100A, 100B, 100C, 101

3 Hinge (heavy weight) TA386 NRP US32D MK 087100

1 Exit Device DG2 16 8804 MK US32D SA 087100

1 Vandal Resistant Trim VRT22(C) US32D RO 087100

1 Overhead Stop 1-X36 (heavy duty concealed) 630 RF 087100

1 Door Closer (P)7500 M 689 NO 087100

1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO

1 Threshold 273x3AFG MSES25SS PE 087100

1 Gasketing (rigid jamb) 303AS TKSP8 PE 087100

1 Door Bottom 217AV TKSP8 PE 087100

Notes: Door can be dogged down for push/pull operation.

Set: 2.0

Doors: 107, 108

3 Hinge TA714 US26D MK 087100



1 Storeroom Lock DG2 10G04 LP MK US26D SA 087100

1 Door Closer (P)7500 M 689 NO 087100


1 Wall Stop RM861 US26D RO 087100

1 Gasketing (adhesive) S44BL (rated openings only) PE 087100

Set: 3.0

Doors: 104


1 Office Lock DG2 10G05 LP MK US26D SA 087100

1 Door Closer (P)7500 M 689 NO 087100




Set: 4.0

Doors: 105


2 Flush Bolt 555/557 (as needed) US26D RO 087100

1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO 087100

1 Classroom Lock DG2 10G37 LP MK US26D SA 087100

2 Overhead Stop 10-X36 (surface) 630 RF 087100

Set: 5.0

Doors: 102B


1 Privacy Set 10U65 LP US26D SA 087100



1 Coat Hook RM802 US26D RO 087100

Set: 6.0

Doors: 102A


1 Privacy Set 10U65 LP US26D SA 087100

1 Door Closer (P)7500 M 689 NO 087100





1 Coat Hook RM802 US26D RO 087100

Set: 7.0

Doors: 100D, 100E, 100F, 100G, 100H, 100J, 100K, 100L

1 All Hardware by others



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 099113 “Exterior Painting” for field painting hollow-metal doors and frames. 3. Section 099123 “Interior Painting” for field painting hollow-metal doors and frames. 4. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door

controls and operators. 5. Division 28 Section “Access Control” for access control devices installed at door

openings and provide as part of a security access control system.

C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for

Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel

Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel

Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies

by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames. 11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames. 12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection

Association.



13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection

Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches (75 by 127 mm).

E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.




A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, “Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell

openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg. F (250 deg. C0 above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size.

3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.

a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.

D. Fire-rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 25. Provide labeled glazing material.

E. Energy Efficient Exterior Openings: Comply with minimum thermal ratings, based on ASTM C1363. Openings to be fabricated and tested as fully operable, thermal insulating door and frame assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.



C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1. Provide minimum ¼-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provided products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company (C). 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company (CU). 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company (S).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities



having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type.

2.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.

B. Exterior Doors (Energy Efficient): Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with

no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”.

a. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on- center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted.

b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R-Value 3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold.

1) Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.36 and R-Value 2.7, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and threshold.



3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level A (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge (0.042 inch - 1.1-mm) thick steel, Model 2.

4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable.

6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9". 7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing

plates from same material as door face sheets.

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece

polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge (0.042-inch - 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2.

4. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet.

5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.

6. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

D. Manufacturers Basis of Design:

1. Curries Company (CU) - Polystyrene Core - 707 Series. 2. Curries Company (CU) - Energy Efficient - 777 Trio-E Series.

2.5 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:



a. CECO Door Products (C) – SU Series. b. Curries Company (CU) – M Series.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:

a. CECO Door Products (C) - SU Series. b. Curries Company (CU) - M Series.

D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.

E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.016 inch.

C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.

2.7 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING

A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated.

B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.



D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to

permit moisture to escape where specified. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install

glazing where indicated. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08

Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

D. Hollow-Metal Frames:

1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.

3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.



4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.

5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".

6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

7. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal stud partitions.

10. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for

preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.



4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.).


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition.

C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed

in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,

twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.6 mm).



d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.



SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1

SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/DASMA 102 – American National Standard Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors.


A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.

B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward.

2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width.

D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283.

1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. m) at 15 and 25 mph (24.1 and 40.2 km/h).



E. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide glazed sectional doors that pass large-missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996.

F. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

G. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Flat Door Sections: 6 inches (150 mm) square. 2. Frame for Paneled Door Sections: 6 inches (150 mm) long of each width of stile and rail

required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum twenty (20) years documented experience.

B. Qualifications For Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum ten (10) years approved by manufacturer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For sectional doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include data for lubrication frequency and spare part sources.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of hardware.



c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through.

d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS

A. Sections: Construct door sections with stiles and rails formed from extruded-aluminum shapes, complying with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, with wall thickness not less than 0.065 inch (1.7 mm) for door section 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) deep. Fabricate sections with stile and rail dimensions and profiles shown on Drawings. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed, 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) minimum diameter, aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door section. Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight-seal joint.

1. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.

2. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

B. Solid Panels: Fabricate of aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper standard with manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick, set in continuous vinyl channel retained with rigid, snap-in, extruded-vinyl moldings or with rubber or neoprene glazing gasket with aluminum stop.

C. Full-Vision Sections: Manufacturer's standard, tubular, aluminum-framed section fully glazed with 6-mm-thick, clear acrylic glazing set in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel and with removable extruded-vinyl or aluminum stops.

2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 (Z180) zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed.



B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track

and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members.

C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.

D. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for metal-framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- (2.01-mm-) nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet (4.88 m) wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.

D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door.

2.4 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.

B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.



2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.

B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet (4.88 m) long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet (4.88 m) long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 7 to 1.

D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.

E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.

2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and

NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Jackshaft, Center Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall above

door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain. 2. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall on right or

left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain.



D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 110513 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Polyphase. b. Volts: 208 V. c. Hertz: 60.

2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. Automatic calibration for door size and weight.

3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

5. Soft start/stop: Reduces mechanical stress on door and components. 6. Electronic Clutch: Prevents damage to arms when locked. 7. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other

electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. Adjustable timer to close up to 240 seconds.

F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

G. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop."

1. Interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.



H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Gear Motors are sealed and require no maintenance.

K. Aluminum Gear and Motor: Body can withstand corrosive and toxic environments.

L. Battery Backup: Provides for operation if AC power is lost.

M. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

N. Radio-Control System: Consisting of the following:

1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door; one per operator. 2. Multifunction remote control. 3. Remote antenna and mounting kit.

2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Aluminum Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings, Electra Model Aluminum and Glass Overhead Sectional Door by Arm-R-Lite Door Manufacturing Co., Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Amarr Garage Doors. b. Arm-R-Lite. c. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. d. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. e. Martin Door Manufacturing. f. Overhead Door Corporation. g. Raynor. h. Rite-Hite Corporation. i. Wayne-Dalton Corp. j. Windsor Republic Doors.

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 100,000.

C. Aluminum Sections: Solid panels and full vision, see drawings for locations of each.



D. Translucent Sections: Manufacturer's standard with manufacturer's standard, nonglazed panels across bottom section of door.

E. Track Configuration: High-lift track.

F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.

G. Windows: Spaced apart the approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; at height indicated on Drawings; installed with glazing of the following type:

1. Clear Tempered Glass: 3 mm thick and complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3.

H. Roller-Tire Material: Case-hardened steel, manufacturer's standard.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side.

J. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.

K. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.

L. Electric Door Operator: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings, Low Profile Jackshaft High Speed, Heavy Duty, High Cycle Commercial and Industrial Door Operator, by Arm-R-Lite or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Arm-R-Lite Door Maufacturing Co., Inc.

2. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, up to 5,000 cycles per day. 3. Operator Type: Jackshaft, center mounted or Jackshaft, side mounted, as shown on

Drawings. 4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar.

a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black.

7. Remote-Control Station: Interior, where shown on Drawings. 8. Other Equipment: Audible and visual signals and Radio-control system.

M. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Match finish of exterior section face.



2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Tracks:

1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) apart.

2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.

3. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.



B. Maximum variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch.

C. Maximum variation from Level: 1/8 inch.

D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straight edge.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean doors, frames and glass.

B. Remove labels and visible markings.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for ribbon walls.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units.

B. Deflection of Framing Members:



1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

C. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

D. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 8.00 lbf/sq. ft. (383 Pa).

F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg. C), material surfaces.

2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

G. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

H. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F (3.23 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.

I. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind.



2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.



E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.



B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

E. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum-framed systems.

F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality

Control" Article.



3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, VersaTherm Series Storefront as manufactured by Tubelite, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation.



2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. NGG Ltd., Inc. 4. Tubelite. 5. United States Aluminum. 6. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Extrusions shall be of aluminum alloy 6063-T5 extruded within commercial tolerance and free from defects impairing strength and/or durability. Main framing sections shall be a minimum of 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) wall thickness. Glazing stop molding shall be a minimum of 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness.

1. Recycled Content: For all aluminum extrusions except those required for doors and door frames, provide manufacturer’s proprietary product fabricated of aluminum with a recycled content of more than 70 percent.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. If galvanizing is not compatible with alloy of component parts, apply heavy coating of epoxy paint where necessary to prevent galvanic action with dissimilar materials.

C. Fasteners and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Inserts: Provide galvanized steel or cast iron inserts of suitable design and adequate strength for condition of use.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Provide high zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc by weight, and complying with SSPC Paint 20.

F. Bituminous Paint: Provide cold-applied asphalt mastic, containing no asbestos fibers.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.



C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.

a. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

1. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.



6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels.

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using head-and-sill-receptor system with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members.

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Extra dark bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.



C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8

mm).

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of

75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



F. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after installation, touch-up scratched, nicked, abraded, chipped, or otherwise damaged areas of the finish so as to be unnoticeable.

B. Cleaning: Wash to remove mortar, plaster, sprayed fire-resistive material, and any other deleterious material from finished surfaces immediately.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Installer, that shall ensure that the glazed storefronts shall be without damage at time of Substantial Completion.



ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.


1. Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.



C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm) in size.

D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, showing full range of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm). 2. Exposed Hardware: Full-size units.

E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and

air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, Tubelite CW3700 Series, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm), or comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation; a Pella company. 2. Modu-Line Inc. 3. Tubelite, Inc. 4. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 5. Winco.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: CW, as indicated on Drawings.

C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.60 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F (3.43 W/sq. m x K).

D. Air infiltration shall not exceed 0.10 cfm/ft. squared when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a test pressure of 6.2 psf.

E. There shall be no uncontrolled water entry when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 and E 547 at a test pressure of 12 psf.

F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg. C) material surfaces.

G. Structural performance per ASTM E 330 shall be based on a maximum allowable deflection of L/175 of the span. The system shall perform to those criteria under a design test pressure of 60 psf.



H. Windows shall meet the performance specification AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S. 2/A440-08, NAFS requirements for Class CW-PG60 914 x 1524 (36 x 60)-C.

2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:

1. Casement: Project out. 2. The 2 inch (51 mm) deep, standard equal-leg frame shall be fabricated from extruded

aluminum, with 0.075 inch (1.9 mm) minimum wall thickness. Joints shall be coped, double screw fastened, and sealed with small joint sealer. The sash shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum, with 0.075 inch (1.9 mm) minimum wall thickness. Mitered hairline joints shall be mechanically staked to solid aluminum, internal corner keys, and sealed with small joint sealer. Glass stops shall be ¾ inch (19 mm) high and shall be able to accept 1 inch (25 mm) thick glazing material.

B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

1. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.

D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC.

1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered, where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lites: Two. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.

E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.

F. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

G. Projected Window Hardware:



1. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the removal of interior screens or using screen wickets.

2. Hinges: Non-friction type, not less than two per sash. 3. Lock: Lever handle and cam-action lock with keeper. 4. Limit Devices: Concealed support arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open limit devices

designed to restrict sash opening.

H. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

I. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.4 INSECT SCREENS

A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.

1. Type and Location: Full, inside for project-out sashes.

B. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.

1. Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet.

C. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm) mesh of 0.011-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire.

1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Extra Dark Bronze.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.

D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration.



F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.

G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

1. Color: Extra Dark bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.



D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:

1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA 502.

2. Air-Infiltration Testing:

a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.

b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place.

3. Water-Resistance Testing:

a. Test Pressure: Two-thirds times test pressure required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance grade indicated.

b. Allowable Water Infiltration: No water penetration.

4. Testing Extent: Three windows of each type as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured.

5. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502.

C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above.



D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.


1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.

b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified installer of Windstorm assemblies.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals:



1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),



Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions



of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.


A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.



2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Stanley Hardware (ST).

2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.

2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.

listed for windstorm components where applicable.



4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation.


a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.

3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.


a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.

D. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of patented controlled keys. Provide bump



resistant, fixed core cylinders as standard with solid recessed cylinder collars. Cylinders are to be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established and maintained.

1. Provide a 6 pin multi-level master key system comprised of patented controlled keys and security and high security cylinders operated by one (1) key of the highest level. Geographical exclusivity to be provided for all security and high security cylinders and UL437 certification where specified.

a. Level 1 Cylinders: Provide utility patented controlled keyway cylinders that are furnished with patented keys available only from authorized distribution.

b. Level 2 Cylinders: Provide utility patented controlled keyway and side bar locking incorporating unique angled bottom pins for geographical exclusivity. Cylinders constructed to provide protection against bumping and picking.

c. Level 3 Cylinders: Provide utility patented controlled keyway and side bar locking incorporating unique angled bottom pins for geographical exclusivity. Cylinders to be UL437 certified and constructed to provide protection against bumping, picking, and drilling.

d. Refer to hardware sets for specified levels.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Degree Series. b. Corbin Russwin (RU) – Access 3 Series.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):

1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.




a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).

J. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software.

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 certified.

1. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.

2. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.

3. Extended cycle test: Locks to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.2 requirements to 2 million cycles.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – CL3300 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 10 Line.

2.6 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.



2.7 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

6. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

7. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

8. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

9. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

10. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.




a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.

2.8 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install

closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security type fasteners as required for proper installation.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – DC6000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 351 Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series.



2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.


a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.


a. Architectural Builders Hardware (AH). b. Rixson Door Controls (RF). c. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).

2.10 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.



D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.11 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.



B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.


A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to



operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. Refer to Section 080671, Door Hardware Sets, for hardware sets.

C. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Glazed entrances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project

according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s).


GLAZING 088000 - 2

c. Importance Factor: 1.15. d. Exposure Category: C.

3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass

to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

5. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg. C), material surfaces.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 1. Insulating glass.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants, and colored spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


GLAZING 088000 - 3

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installers, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e coatings.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."


GLAZING 088000 - 4

H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" and Section 085113 "Aluminum Windows" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C).

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


GLAZING 088000 - 5


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 4 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above grade.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 2. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg. F (W/sq. m x K). 3. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 4. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

2.3 INSULATING GLASS


1. Viracon Glass, Inc. a. Viracon Low-E glass VE1-2M (GL-1).

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,


GLAZING 088000 - 7

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 791 and 795. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000 and SilPruf SCS2000.

D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.


GLAZING 088000 - 9

2.9 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type GL-1: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .26 maximum. 10. Shading Coefficient: 0.44 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum. 12. Light to Solar Gain: 1.84. 13. Provide safety glazing labeling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.


GLAZING 088000 - 10

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.


GLAZING 088000 - 11

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.


GLAZING 088000 - 12

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 1

SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.


A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.


A. Evaluation Reports: For shaft wall assemblies, from ICC-ES.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated, 1 hour.

B. STC Rating: As indicated.

C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Depth: As indicated, 4 inches (102 mm). 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated, 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).

D. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and matching studs in depth.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs, 00.033 inch (0.84 mm).

E. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.

F. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.

G. Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaftliner board, Type X.

H. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner.



b. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Shaftliner. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; ToughRock

Fireguard Shaftliner. d. Lafarge North America, Inc.; Firecheck Type X Shaftliner. e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner. f. PABCO Gypsum; Pabcore Shaftliner Type X. g. Temple-Inland Inc.; Fire-Rated SilentGuard Gypsum Shaftliner System. h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel.

2. Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm). 3. Long Edges: Double bevel.

C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."

D. Cementitious Backer Units: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" and Section 093000 "Tiling."

2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

1. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System. b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.



D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."

F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements.

B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.

D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.



E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

G. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.

H. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly.

I. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.


END OF SECTION 092116.23


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:



a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, 0.027 inch (0.68 mm).

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings, 3-5/8 inches (92 mm).

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, 0.027 inch (0.68 mm).

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).



3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.


b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings, 3-5/8 inches (92 mm).

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.


4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.



G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.



1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.



a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for



structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 2. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing,

gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 3. Section 093000 "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic

tile.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.



B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD


1. American Gypsum. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. Lafarge North America Inc. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.




D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.



2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping

compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.



I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings, vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings, vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings, ceiling surfaces.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.



4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners, or where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.



4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.




TILING 093000 - 1

SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic tile. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Metal edge strips.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. CSA B79-94: Floor, Area, and Shower Drains, and Cleanouts for Residential Construction.

B. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation

C. Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC) Specification Guide 09300 Tile Installation Manual.

D. American National Standard Specifications for the installation of ceramic tile A108 / A118 / A136.1.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."


TILING 093000 - 2

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.



B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.


A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


TILING 093000 - 3


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Joint sealants. 2. Cementitious backer units. 3. Metal edge strips.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


TILING 093000 - 4


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

D. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Tile Type CT-1: Glazed wall tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings, Elevare Collection, Color Lunar #EL40 by Daltile, Inc or comparable product by one of the following: a. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.

2. Module Size: 4 by 16 inches (102 by 406 mm). 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 4. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. 5. Finish: Bright, opaque glaze. 6. Tile Color and Pattern: Lunar #EL40. 7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:


TILING 093000 - 5

a. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 4 by 16 inches (102 by 406 mm).

b. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4 by 16 inches (102 by 406 mm).

c. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile.

d. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile.

e. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), as indicated.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc., MVIS System, Hi-Bond Veneer Mortar. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc.


TILING 093000 - 6

c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc. e. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg. F (60 deg. C) and 212 deg. F (100 deg. C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg. F (60 deg. C) and 212 deg. F (100 deg. C), respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg. F (49 to 60 deg. C) per ASTM D 87.


TILING 093000 - 7

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer. b. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer. c. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout

and Tile. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.


TILING 093000 - 8

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.


TILING 093000 - 9

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern as noted. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same

size, align joints. 2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.

J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove epoxy grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.


TILING 093000 - 10

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Tile Installation B412: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment; TCA B412.

a. Tile Type: CT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size.

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Sprinklers.

5. Perimeter moldings.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2

percent of quantity installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and



ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 70 percent.

C. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

D. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

E. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.



2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACT-1:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, Armstrong, Ultima 9/16” Beveled Tegular #1915, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water

felted. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured).

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.90.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.70.

F. CAC: Not less than 35.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted long edges and square, butt-on short edges.

H. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm), as indicated on Drawings.

I. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm), as indicated on Drawings.

J. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing



according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

G. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM ACT-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, Armstrong, Silhoutte XL, ¼ inch reveal, 9/16-inch Bolt-Slot System, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.

B. Narrow-Face, Uncapped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized; to produce structural members with 9/16-inch- (15-mm-) wide faces.



1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Face Design: With 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) wide, slotted, box-shaped flange. 3. Face Finish: Painted white. 4. Reveal Finish: Painted to match flange color, white.

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,

synthetic-rubber sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,



without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install

panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.

2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 096566 "Resilient Athletic Flooring" for resilient floor coverings for use in

athletic-activity or support areas.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.



B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg. F (10 deg. C) or more than 90 deg. F (32 deg. C).


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg. F (21 deg. C) or more than 95 deg. F (35 deg. C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg. F (13 deg. C) or more than 95 deg. F (35 deg. C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE RB-1:

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite. d. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. e. Roppe Corporation, USA. f. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).



D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), as indicated on Drawings.

E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: Matte.

I. Colors and Patterns: Johnsonite, #20 Charcoal.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flexco, Inc. b. Johnsonite. c. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. d. Roppe Corporation, USA. e. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Description: Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, and Transition strips.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.



3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 096566 - 1

SECTION 096566 - RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interlocking, rubber floor tile.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed

with flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following: 1. Floor patterns.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on the Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For flooring to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish no fewer than 1 box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of floor tile installed.




A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing.

B. Store materials to prevent deterioration. Store tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Adhesively Applied Products:

1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg. F (18 deg. C) or more than 85 deg. F (29 deg. C), in spaces to receive flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg. F (13 deg. C) or more than 85 deg. F (29 deg. C).

3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. 4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer

recommends longer period in writing.

B. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient athletic flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

2.2 INTERLOCKING, RUBBER FLOOR TILE RBT-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, Replay Sports Flooring by Johnsonite, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Action Floor Systems, LLC. 2. Amarco Products. 3. American Floor Products Company, Inc. 4. Horner Flooring Company, Inc. 5. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 6. Mondo America Inc. 7. Musson Rubber Co.

B. Description: Athletic flooring consisting of modular rubber tiles with precision cut, interlocking edges, for free-lay installation.



C. Material: Recycled-rubber compound.

D. Tile Interlock: Hidden.

E. Traffic-Surface Texture: Hammered.

F. Size: Manufacturer's standard-size square tile, 23 inches (58.42 cm) square.

G. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

H. Color and Pattern: Hammered Textured Solid Color: #521, Red Hot.

I. Physical Characteristics: 1. ASTM D 2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness: 65

Shore A. 2. ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated

Flooring or 0.6 or greater. 3. ASTM F 970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit – passes 250 PSI. 4. ASTM D 3389, Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance: Less

than 1.00 gram weight loss. 5. ASTM D 2859, Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Floor

Covering Materials (Pill Test): passes with greater than 1 inch of un-charred area. 6. Johnsonite offers a RESTART reclamation program for returning jobsite scrap materials. 7. Replay Rubber Athletic Flooring contains 92% post-consumer recycled content. 8. SCS FloorScore Certified and meets California Specifications Section 01350. 9. Resilient Rubber Athletic Flooring contains 7% rapidly renewable content. 10. 100% Recyclable. 11. Phthalate, chlorine and halogen-free.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F 710. Proceed with

installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5. 3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Remove substrate paint, coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the resilient athletic flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons, paint, etc., must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to mark the substrate as they could bleed through and stain the flooring material.

E. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

F. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.

G. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing.

1. Do not install flooring until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

H. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust.

I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.



C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise indicated.

D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated.

B. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered.

1. Do not quarter turn tiles.

D. Adhered Flooring: Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.

1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

E. Free-Lay Flooring: Place flooring at locations indicated with all units securely interconnected and fully seated on substrate to form a smooth, level surface.

F. Roll the flooring tabs with a hand roller.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in writing

by manufacturer.

C. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.



1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring for 72 hours after installation.

2. No traffic for 24 hours after installation.

D. Wait 72 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning.

E. A regular maintenance program must be started after the initial cleaning.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.



2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg. F (7 deg. C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg. F (10 and 35 deg. C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg. F (3 deg. C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Pratt & Lambert. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Colors: As indicated on the Finish Legend on the Drawings.

2.3 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.

1. Sherwin Williams, Pro-Cryl Universal primer, B66-310 Series. 2. Comparable product of an approved manufacturer.

B. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. 1. Sherwin Williams, Pro-Cryl Universal primer, B66-310 Series. 2. Comparable product of an approved manufacturer.

2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.

1. Sherwin Williams, Duration Exterior Acrylic, K32-200 Series. 2. Sherwin Williams, DuraCraft Exterior Acrylic Latex Paint. 3. Comparable product of an approved manufacturer.

B. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.

1. Sherwin Williams, Solo 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior, A74 Series. 2. Comparable product of an approved manufacturer.

C. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161.

1. Sherwin Williams, A-100 Acrylic Latex. 2. Comparable product of an approved manufacturer.



2.5 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #8.

1. Sherwin Williams, SWP Exterior Oil-Based Paint. 2. Comparable product of an approved manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."



E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.




A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal, MPI #79. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 1, MPI #10.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. b. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturer for exterior use on galvanized-metal substrates with topcoat indicated.

c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 3), MPI #161.



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on exterior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg. F (7 deg. C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg. F (10 and 35 deg. C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg. F (3 deg. C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.



4. Pratt & Lambert. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

D. Colors: As indicated in the Finish Legend on the Drawings.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.

B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53.



B. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52.

C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143.

D. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #139.

E. Light Industrial Coating, Interior, Water Based, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #153.

2.6 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #49.

B. Alkyd, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #51.

C. Alkyd, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials

being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.



E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.



B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply



additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53 or d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.

B. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.

3. Alkyd over Latex Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51.


ROLL-IN SHOWER BASES 102116 - 1

SECTION 102116 – ROLL-IN SHOWER BASE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Shower receptors fabricated from terrazzo.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for grab bars, purse shelves, and

similar accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For shower receptors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of centerlines of drains.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for compartments, prepared on 6-inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of shower receptor, from manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For shower receptor to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for shower and dressing compartments designated as accessible.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with shower receptor by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Terrazzo: Comply with NTMA's "Terrazzo Specifications and Design Guide" and manufacturer's written instructions for matrix and aggregate proportions and mixing.

B. Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no deleterious or foreign matter. 1. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131. 2. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent. 3. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight.

C. Precast Terrazzo Units: Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for fabricating precast terrazzo units in sizes and profiles indicated. Reinforce units as required by unit sizes, profiles, and thicknesses and as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed-to-view edges and reveals to match face finish. Ease exposed edges to 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) radius.

1. Shower bases

2.2 SHOWER RECEPTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings, Pentelic ADA Roll-In Type shower base, Model # WDA-3405 by Stern-Williams, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Stern-Williams, Inc. 2.

B. General: Manufacturer's standard, prefabricated, terrazzo receptor complete with integral drain.



1. Curb: Not less than 2 inches (51 mm) and not more than 9 inches (229 mm) deep when measured from the top of the curb to the top of the drain; with curb threshold not less than 1 inch (25 mm) below the sides and back of the receptor.

2. Floor: Finished, sloping uniformly toward the drain and not less than 1/4 unit vertical in 12 units horizontal and not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm). Terrazzo’s natural non-slip surface.

3. Drain Strainer: Manufacturer's standard, removable stainless-steel strainer. 4. Drain Gasket: Manufacturer's standard gasket sized to fit waste pipe. 5. Size: 38 inches wide by 40 inches long (965 by 990 mm). 6. Tiling Flange: All side except at threshold.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish on exposed surfaces, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and with slip-resistant floor surface texture.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chrome-plated steel, or solid brass, finished to match the items they are securing; with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install receptors rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure receptors in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

B. Shower Receptors: Install prefabricated shower receptors with drain gasket compression fit to outside diameter of waste pipe. Shower receptor must be set on a level grout or mortar bed.


A. Cleaning:

1. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas. 2. Wash surfaces with cleaner according to NTMA's written recommendations and

manufacturer's written instructions; rinse surfaces with water and allow them to dry thoroughly.

B. Sealing:

1. Seal surfaces according to NTMA's written recommendations. 2. Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.



C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Underlavatory guards. 4. Custodial accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.



2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation.

C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-2888, Classic Series. 2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for up to 5-1/2-inch- (140-mm-) diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

D. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-3944, Classic Series. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable

waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle.

a. Designed for nominal 4-inch (100-mm) wall depth.

4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal. (45.4 L). 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle.

E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-2111, Classic Series. 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 oz. (1.2 L). 5. Materials: Satin-finish Type 304 stainless steel. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type.

F. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-5806 Series. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.



a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Grab Bar:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-6861, Horizontal Two-Wall Bar. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings, L-Shaped, 36 inches (914 mm)

long by 18 inches (457 mm).

H. Mirror Unit:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-165, Series. 2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard, mitered and mechanically interlocked.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES



C. Shower Curtain Rod:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-207x42. 2. Description: 1-inch (25.4-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-)

thick stainless steel. 3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for concealed fasteners.



4. Finish: No. 4 (satin).

D. Shower Curtain:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-204-2. 2. Size: Minimum 12 inches (305 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches (1828 mm) high. 3. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.006 inch (0.15 mm) thick, opaque, matte. 4. Color: White. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches (152 mm) o.c. through top hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with

snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.

E. Folding Shower Seat:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-5193. 2. Configuration: Rectangular seat. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as

selected by Architect. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Dimensions: 25-1/2 inches by 14-7/16 inches.

F. Soap Dish:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-6807. 2. Description: Without washcloth bar. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

G. Robe Hook:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-2116. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Solid brass casing with satin nickel plated finish.

2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

C. Underlavatory Guard:



1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.

2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES



C. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B-224. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). 4. Hooks: Three. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446.




A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

2. Show location of knockouts for hose valves.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Size: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.

E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.




A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping



surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open

180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Silk-screened. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.

b. Interior of cabinet and door.

2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.



1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


1. Section 104413 "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 2. Section 233813 "Commercial-Kitchen Hoods" for fire extinguishing systems provided as

part of commercial-kitchen exhaust hoods.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.



2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.



Site Clearing - 311000 1/6 AUG. 11, 2016

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.


1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for field engineering and surveying.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.



F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials not required to bring the site to final grade shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify One Call Service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.



F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

I. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79, Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer.

1. Use coating with a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.



3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site.

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation which are not in conflict with the work or which are called out to remain.

2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.

3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.



B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 8 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated and as necessary to complete the new construction.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



Earth Moving - 312000 1/14 AUG. 11, 2016

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, and turf and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete pavements. 5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 8. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earth moving progress.

2. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

3. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

4. Section 142400 "Hydraulic Elevators" for excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.

5. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

6. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.

7. Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for drainage of foundations, slabs-on-grade, and walls.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.


Earth Moving - 312000 2/14 AUG. 11, 2016

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf with extra-long reach boom; measured according to SAE J-1179.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

L. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.


Earth Moving - 312000 3/14 AUG. 11, 2016


A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 3. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches. 2. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.


A. Material Test Reports: For each borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.


A. Blasting: Not permitted under any circumstances.

B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Notify "One Call" for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

C. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing," are in place.

D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water.


Earth Moving - 312000 4/14 AUG. 11, 2016

6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

F. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils (for fill) under Structures: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils Under Structures (when placed as fill): Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Satisfactory Soils Under Pavements: Soil Classification Groups CL, ML, GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.


Earth Moving - 312000 5/14 AUG. 11, 2016

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, flowable concrete material produced from the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 2. Fly Ash: No Fly Ash Allowed. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/8-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 5. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 6. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 140-psi compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core


Earth Moving - 312000 6/14 AUG. 11, 2016

encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.


Earth Moving - 312000 7/14 AUG. 11, 2016

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 18 inches wider than pipe or

36 inches wide.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 8 inches minimum each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:


Earth Moving - 312000 8/14 AUG. 11, 2016

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3.8 EXCAVATION FOR ELEVATOR CYLINDER

A. Drill well hole plumb in elevator pit to accommodate installation of elevator-cylinder assembly. Coordinate with applicable requirements for diameter and tolerances in Section 142400 "Hydraulic Elevators."

B. Provide well casing as necessary to retain walls of well hole.

3.9 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Engineer.

3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.


Earth Moving - 312000 9/14 AUG. 11, 2016

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.12 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 24 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"

E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

F. Place and compact initial backfill under building or pavements with subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. Coordinate with utilities testing.

H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.


Earth Moving - 312000 10/14 AUG. 11, 2016

3.14 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 5 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90 percent.


Earth Moving - 312000 11/14 AUG. 11, 2016

3.17 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

3.18 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 334600 "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor.

3.19 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades. 3. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 4. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 5. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


Earth Moving - 312000 12/14 AUG. 11, 2016

3.20 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal

thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not

less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies

with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.


Earth Moving - 312000 13/14 AUG. 11, 2016

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.22 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



Earth Moving - 312000 14/14 AUG. 11, 2016



Concrete Paving - 321313 1/14 AUG. 11, 2016

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Driveways. 2. Roadways. 3. Parking lots. 4. Curbs and gutters. 5. Walks.


1. Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete under this section. 2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and

contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.


1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.



2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. c. Concrete paving subcontractor.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials or 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawnsteel wire into flat sheets.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

C. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.



2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. As Specified under section 033053, Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1 to 1-1/2 inches long.


a. Monofilament Fibers:

1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; FIBRASOL II P. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 100,

Fiberstrand 150. 3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA ECONO-MONO. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) QC Construction Products; QC FIBERS.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry or cotton mats.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.




a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Caltexol CIMFILM. b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; VaporAid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; DSSCC Clear Resin Cure. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; DSSCC Clear Resin Cure. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M CURE R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR SERIES. k. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. l. SpecChem, LLC; PaveCure Rez. m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. n. Tamms Industries, Inc., Euclid Chemical Company (The); TAMMSCURE

WB 30C. o. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB. p. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.



2.7 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Refer to Specification Section 321723 – Pavement Markings.

2.8 PREFORMED TRAFFIC-CALMING DEVICES

A. Refer to Specification Section 321729 – Manufactured Traffic Calming Devices.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES


B. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 4-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

E. As Specified under section 033053, Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.

F. As Specified under section 033053, Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING


B. As Specified under section 033053, Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.



1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck

weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2

inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Place Dowel baskets at joint location in concrete drives.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.



B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 100 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints (for Sidewalks and Plaza): Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints (For Curb and Gutter and Concrete Drives): Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints in drives at 20 feet on center.. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.



3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

L. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.



3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

M. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish (walks and plaza): Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

2. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish (drives and curb and gutter): Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing moisture-retaining-cover curing curing compound or a combination of these as follows:



1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/2 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 1/2 inch, no minus allowed. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 3/8 inch. 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per

12 inches of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch. 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch

per 12 inches of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.



2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days. Hold one specimen if required for ultimate strength.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Construction Manager and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.



B. Drill test cores, where directed by Engineer, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.




THIS PAGER INTENTIALLY LEFT BLANK


Concrete Paving Joint Sealants - 321373 1/6 AUG. 11, 2016

SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants. 2. Hot-applied joint sealants.


1. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt pavement.

2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for joint sealants.





B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants:

1. Site Concrete paving for drive, parking areas, and curb and gutter: Black 2. Sidewalk joints: Gray

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type SL.


a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.



2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690, Types I, II, and III.


a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Hi-Spec or Sealtight 3405. b. Right Pointe; D-3405 Hot Applied Sealant.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. (For contraction joints)

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. (full depth joints i.e. expansion joints)

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.6 PAVEMENT-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints for cement concrete sidewalks [ PJS #1]

1. Joint Location:

a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement. b. Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component, self-leveling. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: Gray.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Pavement Joints in Concrete Pavement and Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement[ PJS-#2].

1. Joint Location:

a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement. b. Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Other joints as indicated. d. Joints between concrete and asphalt pavement. e. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt pavement.

2. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single component. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: Black.



COMPOSITE WOOD FENCES AND GATES 323125 - 1

SECTION 323125 – WOOD COMPOSITE FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood composite fences. 2. Wood composite swing gates. 3. Excavation for steel posts. 4. Concrete steel post foundations.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for post concrete fill. 2. Section 055000 “Metal Fabrications” for steel post and horizontal steel angle rails. 3. Section 061000 “Rough Carpentry” for treated wood rails attached to steel rails. 4. Section 099113 “Exterior Painting” for painting of steel post and rails, and treated wood

rails. 5. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for site excavation, fill, and backfill where composite

wood fences and gates are located.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C94 – Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 2. C177-04 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 3. D143-94 (2000) – Standard Test Method for Small Clear Specimens of Timber. 4. D198-05 – Standard Test Methods of Static Tests of Lumber in Structural Sizes. 5. D1037-06 – Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber and

Particle. 6. Panel Materials. 7. D1413-05 – Standard Test Method for Wood Preservatives by Laboratory Soil-Block

Cultures. 8. D1761-06 – Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood. 9. D1929-96 (2001) – Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of

Plastics.



10. D2047-04 – Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring.

11. Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. 12. D2394-05 – Standard Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-Base

Finish. 13. Flooring. 14. D2395-06 – Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Wood and Wood-Based

Materials. 15. D4761-05 – Standard Test Methods of Mechanical Properties of Lumber and Wood-Base

Structural Materials. 16. E84-07 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 17. F1679-04 Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer (VIT).

B. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) E1-06 – Standard Method for Laboratory Evaluation to Determine Resistance to Subterranean Termites.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Design fence system to withstand Miami/Dade County 110 MPH steady wind and 130 MPH gusting wind tests.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Indicate sizes, profiles, surface finishes, and performance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.

1. Provide Samples 12 inches (300 mm) in length for linear materials, illustrating each size, profile, color and surface finish.


A. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer’s instruction on care and cleaning of wood composite products in maintenance manuals.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle wood composite in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not stack wood composite over 12 feet high.

C. Cover wood composite with waterproof covering, vented to prevent moisture buildup.



1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 10-year commercial warranty providing coverage against checking, splitting, splintering, rotting, structural damage from termites, and fungal decay of wood composite.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood Composite:

1. Reclaimed wood and plastic with integral coloring; free from toxic chemicals and preservatives.

2. Characteristics:

a. Abrasion resistance: 0.01 inch wear per 1000 revolutions, tested to ASTM D2394. b. Hardness : 1124 pounds, tested to ASTM D143. c. Self ignition temperature: 743 degrees F, tested to ASTM D1929. d. Flash ignition temperature: 698 degrees F, tested to ASTM D1929. e. Flame spread rating: 80, tested to ASTM E84. f. Water absorption, 24 hour immersion, tested to ASTM D1037.

1) Sanded surface: 4.3 percent. 2) Unsanded surface: 1.7 percent.

g. Thermal expansion coefficient, 36 inch long samples:

1) Width: 35.2 x 10-6 to 42.7 x 10-6. 2) Length: 16.1 x 10-6 to 19.2 x 10-6.

h. Fastener withdrawal, tested to ASTM D1761:

1) Nail: 163 pounds per inch. 2) Screw: 558 pounds per inch.

i. Static coefficient of friction:

1) Dry: 0.53 to 0.55, tested to ASTM D2047. 2) Dry: 0.59 to 0.70, tested to ASTM F1679. 3) Wet: 0.70 to 0.75, tested to ASTM F1679.

j. Fungus resistance, white and brown rot: No decay, tested to ASTM D1413. k. Termite resistance: 9.6 rating, tested to AWPA E-1. l. Specific gravity: 0.91 to 0.95, tested to ASTM D2395. m. Compression:

1) Parallel: 1806 PSI ultimate, 550 PSI design, tested to ASTM D198. 2) Perpendicular: 1944 PSI ultimate, 625 PSI design, tested to ASTM D143.



n. Tensile strength: 854 PSI ultimate, 250 PSI design, tested to ASTM D198. o. Shear strength: 561 PSI ultimate, 200 PSI design, tested to ASTM D143. p. Modulus of rupture: 1423 PSI ultimate, 250 PSI design, tested to ASTM D4761. q. Modulus of elasticity: 175,000 PSI ultimate, 100,000 PSI design, tested to ASTM

D4761. r. Thermal conductivity: 1.57 BTU per inch per hour per square foot at 85 degrees F,

tested to ASTM C177.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Composite Fences: Comply with light industrial (commercial) application (class) unless otherwise indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings, Seclusions privacy fence system, by Trex Fence Products, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Trex Fence Products.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Fence System: Seclusions Privacy Fence System. 1. Fence height: 8 feet. 2. Components:

a. Metal fence posts, see drawings for sizes. b. Postcaps: Rounded concrete. c. Metal top rails, see drawings for sizes. d. Metal intermediate rails, see drawings for sizes. e. Metal bottom rails, see drawings for sizes. f. Treated wood rails attached to all three (3) metal rails, see drawings for size. g. Wood composite fencing. See drawings for gap sizes between boards.

3. Surface texture: Smooth. 4. Color: Winchester Grey. 5. Size: 1 inch by 6 inch, nominal.


A. Fasteners: 1-5/8 inch Galvanized or corrosion-resistant coated steel.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 1-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387 mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions.



2.5 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: Double leaf, as indicated.

B. Gate Frame Height: 96 inches, as indicated.

C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

D. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from steel channel 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm) with 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) wall thickness.

E. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails.

F. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

G. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

H. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet (1.52 m) wide. Provide cane bolts for pairs of gates.

I. Safety Chains: Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: To prevent gate from swinging open past 180 degrees. 2. Material: Malleable iron.

J. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing. 2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron.

K. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, round steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in both open and closed positions.

L. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #4 - good-quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.

M. Steel Finish: Primed.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

B. Primer Application: Apply zinc-rich epoxy primer immediately after cleaning, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per applied coat, to surfaces that will be exposed after assembly and installation, and to concealed surfaces.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts.

C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches (600 mm) plus 3 inches (75 mm) for each foot (300 mm) or fraction of a foot (300 mm) that fence height exceeds 4 feet (1200 mm).

D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches (50 mm) below grade as indicated on

Drawings to allow covering with surface material. Slope top surface of concrete to drain water away from post.

3. Cut and drill wood composite using carbide tipped blades.

4. Space post as indicated on the drawings.

5. Attached fence brackets to posts as indicated on the drawings.

6. Position metal angles rails as located on the drawings.



7. Attached treated rails to angles as noted on the drawings. Install fence pieces with gap as noted on the drawings with 1-5/8 inch long exterior screws

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range.

B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean wood composite to remove stains: 1. Mold, mildew, and berry and leaf stains: Clean surfaces with conventional deck wash

containing detergent or sodium hypochlorite. 2. Rust or ground-in dirt: Clean surfaces with cleaner containing oxalic or phosphoric acid. 3. Oil and grease: Clean surfaces with detergent containing degreasing agent.



Turf And Grasses - 329200 1/12 AUG. 11, 2016

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Seeding. 2. Hydroseeding. 3. Sodding. 4. Turf renovation. 5. Erosion-control material(s).


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough

grading. 3. Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.



F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.



1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.


A. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."



2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

3. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity;deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of the soil.

1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60.

2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes.

3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.

a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.

b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

C. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.



2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion.

1. Spring Planting: March 15th through May 15th. 2. Fall Planting: Sept. 1st through October 30th.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods:

1. Seeded Turf: 30 days from date of planting completion.

a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.

2. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species as follows:

C. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon). 2. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars.



3. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

4. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). b. 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis). c. 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

2.2 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Approved Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. 2. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

3. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). b. 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis). c. 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of

55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.



C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or

source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.

2.5 FERTILIZERS

A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.

B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.



2.6 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or

source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

C. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

2.7 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.8 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.



1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil

moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.

B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend

planting soil.

a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days.

b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers

according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.



a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.

3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.

B. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.

C. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

3.5 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting

saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of 5 to 6 lb/1000 sq. ft..

C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.



3.6 HYDROSEEDING

A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a

rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate.

3.7 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as

recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.8 TURF RENOVATION

A. Renovate existing turf.

B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.

1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required.

2. Install new planting soil as required.

C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.

D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil.

E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.



F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.

G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.

I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

J. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch or sod as required for new turf.

K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.

3.9 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch. 2. Mow perennial ryegrass to a height of 1 to 2 inches. 3. Mow Kentucky bluegrass and chewings red fescue to a height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches. 4. Mow turf-type tall fescue to a height o 2 to 3 inches.



D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.

3.10 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches.

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
